Omega Vehicle Security Welding System OMP MODL User Manual

OM-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

MANUAL OVERVIEW

This User’s manual provides information relative to the use of the OMP-MODL

Portable Data Logging Systems manufactured by Omega Engineering. The manual

is organized into sections describing the main components of a OMP-MODL system,

from the System Base through the various features within the provided software.

The last section of the manual consists of the Appendices which give detailed

specifications and information for general reference and advanced applications.

After following the instructions for the installation of the HyperWare software, much

can be learned by exploring this manual, the software and the hardware in any

order... without concern for damaging results. However, it is HIGHLY

RECOMMENDED that this User’s manual be read in its entirety before deploying the

OMP-MODL in a real application.

A note on the keyboard / mouse convention used within this manual... Throughout

the manual, instructions on PC keyboard entry or menu selections via mouse are

specified by using italic print such as ENTER which refers to the `Enter’ Key on the

keyboard or FILE which refers to the menu item titled `FILE’.

OMP-MODL SYSTEM: `THE BIG PICTURE’

The OMP-MODL is a battery powered portable data logging and control system. It

can be left at a site to collect data from various analog and digital signal or sensor

inputs. This data is mathematically processed by the OMP-MODL and stored in its

internal memory while simultaneously performing basic onsite alarm functions. The

collected data is then transferred to a PC running the supplied HyperWare software

for data plotting, real-time trending and analysis.

OMP-MNL VS OMP-MODL

The OMP-MNL is a special fixed functionality model of the OMP-MODL family. The

OMP-MNL offers the same functionality as the basic OMP-MODL with the exception

that it cannot be expanded with the addition of Interface Modules.

Throughout this manual, references made to the OMP-MODL generally refer to the

OMP-MNL and the OMP-MODL except where noted.

OMP-MODL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A OMP-MODL portable data logging system consists of a number of components...

both hardware and software.

The main components are listed below and details follow:

OMP-MODL System Base

Interface Modules

HyperWare™ , Windows based software

Options such as modems, PCMCIA, etc

1-1

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

OMP-MODL System Base

The OMP-MODL System Base refers to the main data logger unit composed

of a stack of two interconnected modules... the MLCPU-1 module and the

MLAD-1 module. These two modules combined house the main

microprocessor and support circuitry, memory, power supplies, A to D

converter as well as 6 inputs (4 analog, 1 Cold Junction Compensation

ML-TOP

TOP PLATE

MLADC-1

MLCPU-1

ML-BACK

BOTTOM PLATE/HANGER

ML001

Figure 1... -1: OMP-MODL System Base w/ top and bottom

plates

temperature and 1 digital) and 4 outputs. The System Base can be used

stand-alone as a 6 input / 4 output data logger (OMP-MNL) or expanded with

the addition of Interface Modules, battery packs, and/or display modules.

The System Base includes a connector bus that provides signal connections

to the added Interface Modules.

Interface Modules

Interface Modules (See Figure 1... -2) are add-on layers that provide the

interface to various types of inputs and output signals. The Interface

Modules can be User installed onto the System Base then configured for the

specific type of signal or sensor to be connected to the OMP-MODL.

Interface Modules are configured via software and/or switch settings on the

modules.

1-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

A family of Interface Modules is available for interface to various input signal

types such as thermocouples, RTD’s, voltage, current, frequency, event, etc.

Additionally, Interface Modules are available with outputs for digital alarm

and basic ON/OFF control functions.

Note that the OMP-MNL model does not support installation of additional

Interface Modules.

Configuration Switches

I/O Wiring Terminal

Strip

Inter-Module Connection bus

Side Retaining Screw holes

Figure 1... -2; Interface Module

HyperWare™ Software

Utilized with the OMP-MODL is a powerful Windows based software

package called HyperWare. HyperWare, running on an IBM compatible PC

under the Microsoft Windows environment provides a multitude of functions

for setup of the OMP-MODL as well as analysis of collected data including:

Serial Communications support between the PC and the

OMP-MODL for RS-232 and telephone modem links

(OMP-MNL does not support modem comm)

Programming of the OMP-MODL using the powerful

HyperNet™ visual icon based programming method

Multi-channel, graphic data display of previously

collected data using HyperPlot™

Screen captures of HyperPlot graphs for seamless

integration into other Windows based software

applications such as wordprocessors, spreadsheets, or

desk-top publishing packages

Conversion of collected data files to ASCII text or

Microsoft Excel file formats

1-3

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

Powerful mathematical data manipulation of collected

data during conversion to HyperPlot graphs, ASCII text

files and Excel files

HyperTrack™ real-time graphic and numeric data

display of OMP-MODL inputs and HyperNet nodes

Additional Components

Special function modules are also available to provide:

Telephone Modem Interface - plug-in modules that contain integral

low power 2400 Baud or 14.4 Kbaud telephone modems. These

modules allow for direct connection to standard telephone lines for

data transfer, reprogramming, and control...all from a remote PC

running HyperWare (not supported by OMP-MNL model) .

PCMCIA Memory Card Interface - plug-in module provides a

socket and interface circuitry for removable PCMCIA memory card

support. When utilized, the OMP-MODL stores data to the credit

card sized PCMCIA card. At any time, the card can be unplugged

from its socket and carried or shipped to a another site where the

data can be downloaded to a PC. Advantages of the PCMCIA card

include massive data storage capability, easily transportable data,

field data collection by non-technical staff, and reprogramming of

field units via card.

Battery Pack - add-on module containing 6 alkaline D-Cell batteries

for installations without power.

Front Panel Display and User Switch module - plug-on module

provides a faceplate with 2-line LCD, full set of User switches and

Status indicators.

Special Serial Communications Interface - a variety of special

serial communication types and protocols are available for serial

signal interface. Contact Omega Engineering about your specific

application requirement.

1-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

FEATURES

Designed with the User in mind, the OMP-MODL portable data logging system has a

multitude of integral features ranging from special hardware considerations to

unlimited software programmability and data review. Capabilities include:

Up to 24 channels of analog input or 40+ digital input/outputs.

Configurable Interface Modules accept a multitude of signal types and ranges all

on a single module.

Low power design allows for field logging up to 3 weeks from a set of commonly

available D-Cells.

Pluggable I/O wiring Terminal Strips facilitate quick connect and disconnect of

the sensor and signal wiring harness.

Four integral alarm outputs including two relays

True Microsoft Windows based HyperWare software.

Powerful HyperPlot graphic data display software with seamless integration of

plotted data into other Windows applications.

HyperNet visual icon based programming provides unlimited flexibility in

programming, yet maintains simplicity with drag and drop icon configuration. Set

the OMP-MODL up without writing cryptic lines of code nor experiencing the

rigors of excruciating two button menu tree nightmares.

Intelligent logging methodologies include logging only upon change of an input

(Delta-Logging), Conditional logging based on input levels, Conditional logging

based on time of day or elapsed time, dual speed logging initiated by User

programmed conditions, and more.

Real-Time data display (on optional liquid crystal display) of User defined node

points... ranging from raw input signals to intermediate processed data to data

logged to memory.

User defined alarm messages

Pager call-out upon User defined alarm conditions

(Note: OMP-MNL has limited capabilities from above listing)

1-5

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

SUMMARY OF STEPS IN UTILIZING THE OMP-MODL

In a typical application of the OMP-MODL portable data logging system, the

following sequence of steps would be involved. Details of each step are presented

in later sections of this manual.

1. Install the required Interface Modules into the OMP-MODL

System Base. Configure Interface Module hardware switches if

applicable (eg enabling a front end divider for the +/-30VDC

range on the HLIM-1)

2. Connect a serial cable link between the OMP-MODL and your

PC. Launch HyperWare and establish the connection.

HyperWare will automatically configure for the detected logger

model (OMP-MNL, OMP-MODL, or HyperLogger). Then change

to the HyperNet Development Screen.

3. Query the OMP-MODL for its current hardware configuration by

clicking the NEW button.

4. Construct a Program Net for this logging session by dragging

and dropping icons onto the HyperNet screen, then connecting

signals between the icons. Save the Program Net to disk and

print out a Terminal Strip Adapter wiring diagram for field

reference.

5. Transfer the Program Net to OMP-MODL memory via the serial

link and disconnect the serial link.

6. Install the OMP-MODL at the site and make the appropriate

wiring connections to the I/O Terminal Strips and modem (if

used).

7. Enable the OMP-MODL, then as a quick pre-departure check,

check readings at various pre-programmed Program Net nodes

using the Next and Select buttons while viewing the OMP-MODL

display.

8. Leave the OMP-MODL to collect data.

9. Later, connect up to the OMP-MODL via a serial link (RS-232 or

modem) or retrieve the PCMCIA memory card and from within

HyperWare, download the OMP-MODL memory to a file on the

PC.

10. For a fast and immediate review of the collected data, double-

click on the data icon and HyperPlot will automatically load and

graphically display the collected data.

11. Save the desired HyperPlot graphic view as a Windows Bitmap

file , then switch to your Windows based wordprocessor and

seamlessly insert the saved graphic into your test report.

12. Optionally, use the HyperWare Post-Processing capability to

configure a special data reduction/ conversion icon network.

Then run the collected data file through the post processor and

generate a text file, Excel Spreadsheet file or another HyperPlot

file.

1-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1... INTRODUCTION

13.

1-7

USING THE MODULOGGER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

2... OMP-MODL SYSTEM BASE

SYSTEM BASE OVERVIEW

System Base refers to the main data logger unit composed of a stack of two

interconnected modules... the MLCPU-1 module and the MLAD-1 module. These

two modules combined house the main microprocessor and support circuitry,

memory, power supplies, A to D converter as well as 6 inputs (4 analog, 1 Cold

Junction Compensation temperature and 1 digital) and 4 outputs. The System Base

can be used stand-alone as a 6 input / 4 output data logger (i.e. the OMP-MNL) or

expanded with the addition of Interface Modules, battery packs, and/or display

modules in the case of the OMP-MODL model. Additional modules are covered in

the following chapter.

The System Base includes a connector bus that provides signal connections to any

added Interface Modules.

ML-TOP

TOP PLATE

MLADC-1

MLCPU-1

ML-BACK

BOTTOM PLATE/HANGER

ML001

Figure 2... -1: System Base Assembly

ENCLOSURE / MOUNTING

The OMP-MODL (Figure 2... -1) is built up by plugging together a combination of

modular layers. A top plate (or display module ML-DISP) is then fastened to the top

and a bottom plate/hanger is fastened to the bottom of the stack to complete the

Using the OMP-MODL

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

unit. As modules are added to the stack, the connectors must be aligned and

plugged together as the modules slide together. Four side retaining screws are then

installed into the sides to securely hold the assembly together.

Top Plate

A flat metal plate is provided to cover the top end of the module stack in

units not equipped with the ML-DISP Display and User button module (Refer

to the ML-DISP module in Chapter 3). The top plate fits into a recess at the

top of the unit and is fastened in place with 4 screws.

Bottom Plate / Mounting

A bottom plate is provided to cover the bottom end of the module stack as

well as provide means to mount the logger to a surface. Additionally, in

systems utilizing the Battery Pack (P/N: ML-BATT) the bottom plate is an

integral part of the Battery Pack and holds the batteries as well. The ML-

BATT is described in Chapter 3.

KEYHOLE SLOTS

ANCHOR

SCREWS

ML003

Figure 2... -2: Bottom Plate / Hanger

Mounting is done by fastening the unit to a surface with round head screws

through the keyhole slots and optionally locking the unit in place with the

addition of another anchor screw (Figure 2... -2)

To mount the unit, remove the bottom plate from the logger by removing the

4 side retaining screws in the side of the plate, then use the plate as a

template to mark the screw hole locations. The bottom plate can then be

mounted on the screws. If desired, 2 locking screws can be added in the

bottom holes to securely hold the logger and prevent it from being slid up

and off of the keyhole screws.

Slip the logger back into the bottom plate and install the 4 side screws.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

TIP: For applications utilizing loggers equipped with a large number of

Interface Modules, the stack can become rather tall. In these

applications, side plate mounting may be desired. Contact LBI for

details on the side mounting bracket..

MLCPU-1 MODULE

Overview

EXTERNAL POWER

RELAY R1

RELAY R2

+5V

RELAY 2

RELAY 1

STATUS

TTL

FEEDBACK

GND

SERIAL PORT

STOP

POWER

RESET

ENABLE

Figure 2... -3: MLCPU-1 Module (end view)

The MLCPU-1 module contains the microprocessor, memory, power

supplies, GPDI input circuitry, alarm output circuitry, User push buttons and

status indicators. Various components in this module are identified in Figure

2... -3. This module is required in all OMP-MODL systems.

User Interface Indicators and Buttons

An array of LED indicators and buttons are available at one end of the

MLCPU-1. Identification and function follows:

Main Power Switch:

A small recessed toggle switch controls the power to the logger.

Using a pencil or other small object, flip the switch side to side to

turn power ON/OFF. Upon turning power ON, after a short delay,

the Feedback LED (see following) will blink 5 times indicating that

the unit has sequenced through a power-up reset and is operative,

ready to accept commands.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

Feedback LED Indicator:

The green Feedback LED is used to provide feedback to the User as

buttons are pressed and the logger performs various commands.

These responses include:

Command

Feedback LED Response

Enable Unit

2 blinks

5 blinks

Stop Unit

Power-Up Reset

Two Button Reset

System Initialization (3 button) 10 blinks

Memory Clear

ON continuously for 10

seconds then OFF

Executing Program Net

1 blink every 10 seconds

Status LED Indicator:

The green STATUS LED is merely a visual indicator provided for

User specified application from within a Program Net. This LED can

be programmed by the User to indicate Alarms and other operational

feedback.

Alarm LED Indicators (2):

The ALARM LED’s labeled R1 and R2, provide visual indication of

the state of the two programmable operation output relays included

in the MLCPU-1. When an ALARM LED is ON, the relay contacts

are closed.

ENABLE Button:

Pressing the ENABLE button initiates the execution of the current

Program Net residing in OMP-MODL memory. Upon press of the

ENABLE button, the Feedback LED (see following) will blink 2 times

indicating acknowledgement of the command. If the logger is

equipped with the ML-DISP module, the the LCD will change to

display ENABLED on the second line.

If the Feedback LED does not blink twice in response to a press, the

unit may already be Enabled or may have been previously running

in the Rotary Memory Mode.

Note that operation of the ENABLE button may be inhibited if the

logger is programmed with in the Rotary Memory Logging mode.

In this mode, only one logging session can be logged. To initiate

another, the first session must be cleared from memory. This

parameter is set within the Global icon during construction of a

Program Net. Refer to the Master Icon Reference Appendix for

details on the Global icon.

While enabled and executing a Program Net, the Feedback LED will

blink every 10 seconds indicating operation.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

FYI: The label ENABLE was chosen rather than START for a subtle but

important reason. When the ENABLE button is pressed, execution of the

Program Net commences... but that does not necessarily mean that data

logging to memory has started.

For example, a Program Net is developed and uploaded to the OMP-

MODL that includes a setpoint function that controls logging to memory.

For example log only when the kiln temperature exceeds 150F. Pressing

the ENABLE button merely causes the OMP-MODL to take readings of the

kiln temperature... but logging to memory STARTS when the temperature

rises above the 150F threshold.

STOP Button:

Pressing STOP at any time causes the OMP-MODL to finish

sequencing through the currently executing Program Net, then stop

executing. The Feedback LED will blink twice to indicate

acknowledgement of the command. If the logger is equipped with

the ML-DISP module, the LCD will change to display STOPPED on

the second line.

The STOP button can also be used to clear data that has been

logged to memory.

CLEARING MEMORY WITH THE STOP BUTTON:

To Clear data memory with the STOP button, press and hold the

STOP button. The Feedback LED will light continually for

approximately 10 seconds, then turn off. When the LED turns

off, memory has been cleared and the button can be released.

RESET Button:

A hardware reset of the OMP-MODL microprocessor can be

performed by depressing and releasing both the STOP and RESET

buttons at the same time. This normally should not be required but

in the event that a noise glitch or some other malfunction occurs,

this manual Reset capability is provided for a User to force a reset of

the microprocessor from the front panel.

After a Reset, the Feedback LED will blink 5 times indicating that a

the system has been reset. This Reset does not clear data memory

nor the Program Net currently residing in logger memory.

WATCH-DOG TIMER RESET

A special automatic reset circuit is incorporated into the System

Base to add additional reliability to the OMP-MODL system. This

circuitry, called a Watch-Dog Timer will force the OMP-MODL

microprocessor to reset and continue operation where it left off

(within 2 seconds) in the event that an unforseen hiccup or noise

glitch (for example, from a nearby lightning strike) causes the

microprocessor to lose its place or lock-up.

Although this circuit normally should not operate, it adds one

more level of robustness to the OMP-MODL for handling

unforeseen events.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

3-Button System Initialization:

A complete initialization of the logger that will clear data memory

and program memory can be performed using the ENABLE, STOP

and RESET buttons. This sequence is normally only used when a

unit is upgraded in the field with a new EPROM or in the event that

the Program memory has become corrupted due to unforeseen

events such as disassembly while powered up, improper insertion of

a PCMCIA card, exposure to an extreme noise noise glitch (for

example, from a nearby lightning strike) that has caused the

microprocessor to lose its place or lock-up or other malfunction.

To perform this 3-Button Initialization,

1. Depress and hold the ENABLE button

2. Momentarily, depress the STOP and RESET buttons

simultaneously.

3. After a second or so, release the ENABLE button.

4. Observe the Feedback LED. After a few seconds, the

Feedback LED should blink 10 times in succession. This

indicates that a complete system initialization has been

performed.

If the logger is equipped with a ML-DISP modules, after a

short sequence of display messages on the LCD, a

SYSTEM INITIALIZED message should display

momentarily indicating that the logger was properly

initialized. If this message does not display, repeat the

procedure.

After initialization, reprogram the logger with a new Net Program

and the unit is ready to operate.

RS-232 Serial Communications Port

A female 6/6 RJ-12 modular phone type jack is provided on the MLCPU-1

for RS-232 communications. A mating 6 conductor cable (CAR-4) plugs into

this port. The other end of the cable plugs into the 9-pin or 25 pin serial port

on a PC via a modular plug to DB-9F (P/N: RJDB-9H) or DB-25F (P/N:

RJDB-25H) adapter. Note that this port is not for direct connection of a

telephone line.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

CAUTION

The RS-232 jack is only for connection of RS-232

type signals (via the supplied cable and adapters)

and is not for direct connection of a telephone line.

For telephone modem communication with the OMP-

MODL, utilize the OMP-MODL Modem Interface

Module.

Direct connection of a telephone line to the RS-232

jack may result in permanent damage to the OMP-

MODL.

For longer communication distances, a longer cable can be used. Longer

cables can be purchased from Omega Engineering or from stores handling

standard phone supplies. If a cable is procured from a source other than

Omega Engineering, insure that the cable is 6 conductor and has the plugs

installed correctly. Refer to Appendix I for wiring details.

Although the RS-232 specification is only for communication distances up to

50’, communication with the OMP-MODL via RS-232 at Baud rates up to

19.2 Kbaud has been successfully achieved with 100’ of cable.

The OMP-MODL RS-232 communication circuitry powers up when a cable is

plugged into the port and a connection is established from within the

HyperWare Software. When the communication circuitry is powered up, an

additional load of approximately 30 mA is put on the logger power supply.

For this reason, when not communicating with the OMP-MODL and

operating from battery power, disconnect the connection from within

HyperWare and/or unplug the RS-232 cable. For extended communication

sessions battery life can be preserved by powering the OMP-MODL from an

external power supply.

TIP: For relative reference, with the communication

circuitry powered up, a new set of batteries will discharge

in approximately 3 days.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

Terminal Strip Connections

The MLCPU-1 is provided with a terminal strip connector for connection of

power, input and output wiring (Figure 2... -4). The terminal strip connector

can be unplugged from the module allowing for quick disconnect and

reconnection of wiring. Connection details follow:

EXTERNAL POWER

RELAY R1

RELAY R2

RELAY R1

RELAY R2

+5V

STATUS

TTL ALARM OUTPUT

FEEDBACK

GND

SERIAL PORT

STOP

POWER

RESET

ENABLE

ML004

Figure 2... -4: MLCPU-1 Terminal Strip Connections (end view)

External Power (Terminals 1 & 2)

An external power source may be used to power the OMP-MODL .

If an external power supply is connected to the OMP-MODL and its

supply voltage is greater than approximately 10.7 VDC, the OMP-

MODL will operate from the external supply and the batteries will not

be used. In the event that the external power fails or drops below

10.7V, the OMP-MODL will automatically transfer to battery power

and continue operation.

The External Power Supply terminals will accept either AC or DC

input and polarity is not relevant.

EXTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE:

A field selectable dual input range feature allows the logger to

accomodate a very wide range of input voltage applied to the

External terminals. A jumper provided on the MLCPU-1

programs the input range for HI or LO range:

LO Range: (8 to 24 Vdc / 10 to 23 Vac) (factory default)

HI Range: (11 to 32 Vdc / 12 to 23 Vac)

Using the OMP-MODL

2-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

To change the setting, access must be gained to the jumper on

the top of the MLCPU-1 module (Figure 2... -5). Per the

assembly / disassembly instructions in Chapter 3, open the

logger to gain access to the top of the MLCPU-1. The Hi/Lo

jumper is installed on two pins of a 3 pin header. To program a

new range, remove and reinstall the jumper on the desired pair of

pins.

CPU

HIGH RANGE

LOW RANGE

ML005

Figure 2... -5: MLCPU-1 External Power Voltage Range Jumper

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION:

The MLCPU-1 incorporates circuitry to protect the logger from

over-voltage, transient voltage spikes, and over-current

conditions encountered on the External Power Terminals. In the

event that extended out of spec voltages are impressed on the

External Power terminals, protective circuitry will activate and

blow the 1.5A input fuse. Replacement fuses (P/N: Littelfuse

27301.5) are available from Omega Engineering Incorporated or

electronic distributors.

BATTERY CONNECTION PIGTAIL:

The MLCPU-1 is equipped with a pigtail and connector for

connection to the ML-BATT battery pack module. This connector

dangles from the bottom side of the MLCPU-1 circuit board. If

batteries are not utilized, this pigtail should be left unconnected.

Details on connection and use are provided in the section on the

ML-BATT battery module in Chapter 3.

Relay R1 (Terminals 3 & 4)

Wiring connections for Output Relay 1. The relay is a normally open

device with contacts rated for 500 ma MAX at 32VDC MAX .

Operation is dependent on logic associated with the Relay Alarm #1

icon within the Program Net executing in the logger.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

Relay R2 (Terminals 5 & 6)

Wiring connections for Output Relay 2. The relay is a normally open

device with contacts rated for 500 ma MAX at 32VDC MAX.

Operation is dependent on logic associated with the Relay Alarm #2

icon within the Program Net executing in the logger.

+5V (Terminal 7)

This terminal provides a current limited, voltage regulated +5 VDC

supply for alarm and sensor excitation applications. The supply is

current limited to approximately 100mA and is short-circuit

protected. ON/OFF control of the output is dependent on logic

associated with the +5 Volt Out icon within the Program Net

executing in the logger.

Loads should be connected between Terminal 7 ( + ) and GND at

Terminal 9 ( - ).

TTL Alarm Output (Terminal 8)

A low current 5Vdc rated digital output is available from this terminal

under control from the Digital Alarm #1 icon within HyperNet. The

output swings from 0 to 5VDC relative to the GND terminal (terminal

9) and is intended for sourcing and sinking signal level loads only.

The output is current limited with an internal 4.3Kohm series resistor

Figure 2... -6: System Base Digital Output

(TTL) Current Sourcing Characteristics

which results in varying output voltage levels as a function of load or

sourced current as shown in Figure 2... -5. This Digital Output

provides sufficient current for control of the Omega Engineering

RPS-1, Rechargable Power Supply which can be used for powering/

exciting higher current sensors such as 4-20mA transmitters (see

Accessories in Appendix H).

GND (Terminal 9)

This terminal serves as a common or ground connection for the

Digital Outputs and for the +5V supply. It is connected directly to

the OMP-MODL circuit ground.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

RTC / Memory Backup Battery

The OMP-MODL utilizes static ram for internal data storage which requires a

constant power supply to maintain its memory. Similarly, the Real Time

Clock (RTC) that keeps track of the date and time within the OMP-MODL

runs continually whether the main power switch is ON or OFF.

When the main power is ON, the memory and RTC draw their power from

the D-Cell batteries (or a connected external power supply). When the main

power is switched OFF, power for memory and the RTC automatically

switches to a small coin type lithium cell that is mounted on the main OMP-

MODL circuit board (Figure 2... -7).

EXTERNAL POWER FUSE

LITHIUM CELL

BATTERY PIGTAIL & CONNECTOR

ML006

Figure 2... -7: Memory and RTC lithium battery location (bottom of

MLCPU-1)

This cell will provide power for the RTC and memory for approximately one

year. Any time that the OMP-MODL main power is ON extends this lifetime.

At any time, the approximate state of charge of the lithium cell can be

displayed on the LCD under the SYSTEM STATUS / SUPPLY VOLTAGES

menu or from a serially connected PC running HyperWare and a Status

Query command. For lithium cell replacement procedure, refer to Appendix

MLAD-1 MODULE

Overview

The MLAD-1 module contains the Analog to Digital converter, General

Purpose Digital Input channel circuitry, Cold Junction Compensation

circuitry, and four channels of analog input. This module plugs into the top

of the MLCPU-1 module (or MLIM-5 if so equipped) and is required in all

OMP-MODL systems.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

A terminal strip is provided at one end of the module for the connection of

sensor and signal wiring. The terminal strip can be unplugged for mass

connect/disconnect of the field wiring. Connections are defined in Figure 2...

-8 and details on each of the functions follow.

GPDI

CJC

17 18

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

INTERNAL CJC

EXTERNAL CJC

EARTH GROUND

SHIELD

ML007

Figure 2... -8: Terminal Strip connections (MLAD-1 Module, end view)

Four Channel Analog Input (terminals 1 through 12)

The MLAD-1 module provides four channels of analog input signal

conditioning identical to that provided by the MLIM-1 Module (Chapter 3).

Each of the four channels can be individually programmed for thermocouple,

DC Voltage and DC Current inputs. Hardware configuration switches are

provided on the MLAD-1 circuit board to configure the input channels for DC

current and medium or high level DC voltage inputs.

Refer to the MLIM-1 Module section in Chapter 3 for details on the input

configuration switches, wiring connections and applications of these inputs.

Cold Junction Compensation (terminals 13, 14, & 15)

Integral to the MLAD-1 is a cold junction compensation (CJC) sensor. This

sensor is a 10 Kohm @25C (Fenwall curve 16) thermistor which is located

by terminal strip header on the inside of the MLAD-1. The CJC sensor

senses the temperature of the terminal strips (Internal Mode) which in turn,

is used in the mV to temperature conversion equation required in

thermocouple measurements. Additionally, the CJC sensor can be used

within a Program Net to monitor the temperature inside the OMP-MODL

enclosure.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

INTERNAL CJC SENSING APPLICATIONS:

For OMP-MODL applications with thermocouple inputs

connected directly to the MLAD-1 or any installed MLIM-1 Analog

Input modules, a wire jumper must be installed across terminals

13 and 14 (marked INT for internal). The OMP-MODL is shipped

from the factory with this jumper installed.

NOTE: If thermocouples are connected to the OMP-

MODL on any channel, a wire jumper must be installed

across the CJC terminal strip terminals marked INT or

erroneous readings will occur..

EXTERNAL CJC SENSING APPLICATIONS:

If thermocouples are not being directly connected to the TSA (ie

CJC is not required), this CJC sensor channel can be used to

measure temperatures (or limited range resistance) outside of

the enclosure. A 10 Kohm thermistor (with the specified

resistance curve) or a resistance type sensor can be connected

across the terminals marked EXT on the CJC terminal strip.

Refer to the CJC Icon in Appendix A for additional details.

For external sensing applications, copper lug potted thermistors

with 10’ leads are available from Omega Engineering.

Chassis Ground (terminals 16)

A single terminal is provided on the MLAD-1 which connects to the internal

Chassis Ground circuit within the logger. In installations where sensor wiring

utilizes a Shield conductor connection to I/O module terminal strips (eg in

many MLIM-1 applications) a single conductor should be connected from

this terminal to a good earth ground to complete the shielding circuit.

General Purpose Digital Input (terminals 17 & 18)

Integral to the MLAD-1 is a single digital input channel that can be

configured under HyperNet as an Event or Counter input. The GPDI input

signal (either a contact closure or 0 to 15VDC max driven signal) is applied

across the two terminals observing polarity.

The operation of the GPDI is configured during construction of the Program

Net within HyperNet. Programming details and applications are described in

the Master Icon Reference in Appendix A.

Using the OMP-MODL

2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... OMP-MODL System Base

NOTES:

Using the OMP-MODL

2-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2... ModuLogger System Base

Using the ModuLogger

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

By adding Interface Modules (Figure 3... -1), the OMP-MODL System Base can be

expanded for additional I/O channels, modem, display, PCMCIA memory, and

battery operation. A full family of modules is available to meet most signal interface

and/or feature requirements.

This section covers the installation, wiring, hardware configuration, and application

considerations of the basic OMP-MODL family of Interface Modules. As additional

modules are added, the instruction sheets should be added to this section for

reference.

Programming and use of added Interface Module channels is done with the

HyperNet Program Net and is covered within Chapter 7 and the Master Icon

Reference in Appendix A.

I/O Wiring Terminal

Strip

Inter-Module Connection bus

Side Retaining Screw holes

Figure 3... -1: Interface Module

HANDLING

As with all electronic systems, static electricity discharge can weaken or cause

permanent damage to circuitry. Protective circuitry is integral to the OMP-MODL

system including the Interface Modules, however when the Interface Modules are not

installed in the System Base, the protective circuitry is not effective. Therefore,

when handling Interface Modules, it is recommended that reasonable static control

procedures be followed.

Before touching the Interface Module, discharge static electricity

built up in your body be touching a grounded point such as a

water faucet, cover plate screw on a receptacle, metal surface

of a grounded appliance or other earth ground.

Do not wrap or store the Interface Module in static generating

materials such as untreated styrofoam packing `peanuts’ or

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

plastic bags. Anti-Static bags are available for storage of static

sensitive components.

INSTALLATION

When shipped, Interface Modules are provided with side screws and any necessary

accessories. If ordered with a logger, the Interface Modules are typically factory

installed in the System Base before shipment.

The Interface Modules stack onto the System Base building a `layered’ logger to

meet the User’s needs. All modules (except the ML-BATT Battery Pack) have an

inter-module connection bus that connects signals and power between the

modules(Figure 3... -1).

To add a module, perform the following steps and any special Installation

Instructions detailed in the following Interface Module specific sections.

1. Review the Interface Module instructions and observe any

special installation instructions. These may include setting

Module Address Switches and Input Configuration Switches.

2. Turn the OMP-MODL System Power switch OFF.

3. Determine the Port (layer) at which the new Interface Module is

to be installed. Refer to Figure 3... -4. Note that some modules

must be installed at a particular position (eg the MLIM-5 must be

installed between the MLCPU-1 and the MLAD-1 modules).

Also note that many modules require a Module address to

be programmed through the setting of one or more Module

Address Switches. This is covered in detail in the module

specific sections that follow.

4. Remove the four side retaining screws (Figure 3... -1) from the

enclosure nearest the joint into which the new module is to

added.

1. Carefully separate the layers while keeping them parallel (Figure

3... -2). Minimize the amount of twisting or rocking as this will

result in bent connector bus pins.

CORRECT MODULE SEPERATION

INCORRECT

ML011

Figure 3... -2: Separating Modules without bending connector pins...

2. After separation, examing the gold connector bus pins on the

Interface Module. These pins must be straight to insure proper

3-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

alignment and connection with the mating module. If any pins

are bent, straighten them with a small pliers.

3. Orient the Interface Module to be added so that the similar

length connector bus’s align and the terminal strips or other User

controls are all at the same end.

4. While peering into the gap between the modules, carefully

match up the connector pins on one module and the mating

socket on the other module and slide the two together. Examine

the connectors from different views as the modules come

together to insure that all of the pins are properly aligned.

5. Press the modules firmly together and reinstall the side access

screws to hold the modules together.

1. Turn the logger power ON and observe the Feedback LED

(Figure 3... -3) on the MLCPU-1 module. Within a few seconds,

the LED should blink 5 times indicating that a system reset has

been performed. This is also a fairly good indication that the

unit has been reassembled correctly.

EXTERNAL POWER

RELAY R1

RELAY R2

RELAY R1

RELAY R2

+5V

STATUS

TTL ALARM OUTPUT

FEEDBACK

GND

SERIAL PORT

STOP

POWER

RESET

ENABLE

ML004

Figure 3... -3: Feedback LED on MLCPU-1

Alternatively, if the logger is equipped with the ML-DISP

module, observe the LCD for normal operation and any error

messages afer switching the power ON.

If an indication of proper operation is not seen, repeat the

installation procedure, examining connector pins closely for bent

or misaligned pins.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

ML-DISP (Display and User Interface Module)

Must be mounted as Top Layer

Input / Output Module Layer

Module Position # 6

Input / Output Module Layer

Module Position # 5

Input / Output Module Layer

Module Position # 4

Input / Output Module Layer

Module Position # 3

Input / Output Module Layer

Module Position # 2

MLAD-1 Layer. Analog Inputs

fixed at Module Position # 1

MLIM-5 Layer (if installed)

Must layer between MLAD-1 and MLCPU-1

MLCPU-1 Layer. Fixed Position

ML-BATT Battery Pack. Connects

to bottom of MLCPU-1 module

Figure 3... -4: Layer / Module Address Reference

3-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

INTERFACE MODULE OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS:

Each Interface Module has specific characteristics and instructions for set-up and

use that are unique to that particular module. These instructions are included in

following sections or provided with the Interface Module at the time of purchase. As

Interface Modules are added to a User’s OMP-MODL, the instruction sheets

provided should be added to this section of the manual.

The instructions for most Interface Modules include both hardware and software

details. Software instructions will commonly be referenced from other sections of

this manual such as in the chapter on HyperComm for the modem modules and the

chapter on HyperNet programming for analog and digital Interface Modules.

Instruction sheets for the following Interface Modules are currently included in this

section:

ML-BATT; Battery Pack Module

ML-DISP; Display and User Interface Module

MLIM-1; Analog (thermocouple, Vdc and Adc Interface

Module (Configuration shared with MLAD-1 Module)

MLIM-2; Event, Frequency, Count Interface Module

MLIM-4; RTD, Thermistor, and Resistance Module

MLIM-8; Digital Interface Module (8 channel digital I/O)

MLIM-5 PCMCIA Memory Card Interface Module

MLIM-5 PCMCIA Memory Card Interface Module with

2400B modem

MLIM-5 PCMCIA Memory Card Interface Module with

14,400B modem

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

NOTES:

3-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

ML-BATT; BATTERY PACK MODULE

The OMP-MODL can be equipped with the ML-BATT module to provide battery

power for portable or remote site applications. The ML-BATT module includes two

holders, each of which contains 3 D-cells, resulting in a nominal 9Vdc supply to the

OMP-MODL. The ML-BATT module fastens to the bottom of the MLCPU-1 module

with 4 side screws. A pigtail and polarized connector facilitate quick connection to

the mating connector provided on the MLCPU-1 module (Figure 3... -6).

Field Installation of the ML-BATT Module

Upon receipt of the module, examine the unit and insure that the batteries

are firmly seated in their holders. The ML-BATT module fastens to the

bottom of the MLCPU-1 module with 4 machine screws. The batteries must

be installed (Figure 3... -5) with the positive terminal toward the holder end

marked with a red washer.

RED (+) POLARITY MARKERS

ML-BATT Module

Alkaline D-Cells ( 6 )

(retaining tubes not shown)

Battery Connection Pigtail

ML009

Figure 3... -5: ML-BATT Battery Pack Module

Remove the existing back plate installed on the OMP-MODL by removing

the 4 side screws and gently sliding the back plate off of the MLCPU-1

module. This back plate will be replaced by the ML-BATT module and is no

longer required.

A foam spacer is provided to help hold the batteries in their holders. A slot

is cut in the foam spacer. Route the wire pigtail extending from the MLCPU-

1 through this slot. Connect the polarized connector on the end of the wiring

pigtail in the ML-BATT module to the mating connector on the MLCPU-1

module.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Align and stack the ML-BATT and MLCPU-1 modules with the foam spacer

against the MLCPU-1 printed circuit board and the connector on the ML-

BATT side. Fasten the modules together with the four side retaining screws.

ML-CPU MODULE

POLARIZED CONNECTORS

FOAM RETAINER

6 ALKALINE D-CELLS

BOTTOM PLATE

INITIAL INSTALLATION

SCREWS

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

ACCESS SCREW

ML009

Figure 3... -6: ML-BATT module details

Field Replacement of Batteries

To access the batteries, remove the four retaining screws holding the bottom

plate to the OMP-MODL assembly. The battery connector can then be

unplugged and the batteries be replaced by popping them out of the holders

and reinstalling new batteries. Align the batteries with the positive terminal

toward the holder end marked with a red washer. Reconnect the battery

connector, adjust the position of the foam spacer and fasten the bottom

plate back onto the OMP-MODL assembly with the four side screws.

Note that the batteries can be accessed by removing any level of the 4 side

access screws on the ML-BATT module, however it is typically easiest to

remove the 4 on the metal bottom plate.

Alkaline D-cells are recommended for use in the OMP-

MODL as they contain significantly more energy than

standard or `heavy-duty’ cells and will provide

substantially longer recording capability. Depending on

the Program Net within the OMP-MODL, a fresh set of

alkaline D-cells can power the OMP-MODL for up to 4

weeks of logging.

3-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

ML-DISP; DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE MODULE

The OMP-MODL can be equipped with the ML-DISP module ( Figure 3... -7) to

provide a 2 line liquid crystal display (LCD), front panel Status/Alarm indicating LEDs

and a full complement of User buttons. With these features, system messages,

status, and more can be accessed in the field without a serial connection to a PC.

ModuLogger 2.27

Memory Full

Select

Enable

Status

Stop

Alarm 1

Reset

Alarm 2

Figure 3... -7: ML-DISP Module

Module Installation:

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions of the Interface Module onto the System Base. No special

considerations are required for installation of this module.

I/O Module Layer Requirements / Limitations:

The ML-DISP module must be installed as the top layer in a OMP-MODL

system (obviously). The ML-DISP does not utilize any Module Address

switches.

Hardware Input Signal Configuration Switches:

The ML-DISP does not utilize any configuration switches and is

automatically detected.

Push Buttons

Located on the right side of the ML-DISP are five momentary push buttons

providing basic OMP-MODL operational control. These buttons provide the

following features:

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

NEXT and SELECT

The NEXT and SELECT buttons are for User control of the liquid

crystal display (LCD) information displays. Pressing NEXT will

advance the LCD to the next menu item at the current menu level.

Pressing the SELECT button selects that menu item and a new level

of menus or results are displayed.

A detailed explanation of the operation of the NEXT and SELECT

buttons is covered in a later section on the Display.

ENABLE Button:

The ENABLE button duplicates the functions of the ENABLE button

located on the end of the MLCPU-1 module (discussed in prior

section MLCPU-1 Module).

STOP Button:

The STOP button duplicates the functions of the STOP button

located on the end of the MLCPU-1 module (discussed in prior

section MLCPU-1 Module).

As discussed in that section, memory can be cleared by holding this

button down for approximately 10 seconds. Memory can also be

cleared through a menu sequence utilizing the NEXT and SELECT

buttons on loggers equipped with the ML-DISP module. See Display

section following.

RESET Button:

The RESET button duplicates the functions of the RESET button

located on the end of the MLCPU-1 module (discussed in prior

section MLCPU-1 Module).

3-Button System Initialization:

A complete initialization of the logger that will clear data memory

and program memory can be performed using the ENABLE, STOP

and RESET buttons. This sequence (discussed in prior section

MLCPU-1 Module) can be performed using the buttons located on

the ML-DISP module as well.

Display

An extended temperature range 2-line by 16 character liquid crystal display

(LCD) is provided. Information ranging from Operational Mode to System

Status to Alarm Messages to signal readings can all be displayed on the

LCD. The LCD is continually ON. Information to be displayed is controlled

by a User via the SELECT and NEXT front panel buttons.

Additionally, alarm messages will be automatically displayed on the LCD

when User pre-programmed conditions are met. These messages and

3-10

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

conditions are defined by the User in the Program Net developed within

HyperNet ( Chapter 7) and loaded into OMP-MODL memory.

Display Operation

Information that can be displayed on the LCD is arranged in a

hierarchical format and is accessed by a User via the NEXT and the

SELECT buttons on the front panel of the OMP-MODL. The menu

structure is diagrammed in Figure 3... -8.

Pressing the NEXT button advances the display to the next available

item in that menu level. Repetitive presses of the NEXT button will

result in a circular sequencing through all of the available menu

items on the current level and eventual repeat of the sequence.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

SELECT

Shows the EPROM version number and the

current operating mode

LOGGER X.XX

<MODE>

SELECT

Shows the current date

and time in the Logger

SYSTEM

STATUS

Display

Date and Time

Display

Remaining Memory

Shows the % memory used

and # of samples recorded

Unit Name and ID

Shows the Unit Name and

ID (set from HyperWare)

Name of the Net Program

(set from HyperWare with

Global Icon)

Net Program Name

Net Program

Description

Desc. of Net (set from

HyperWare with Global Icon)

Voltage of the batteries or

external supply, whichever

is greater

System Supply

Voltage

Return to Top

Jumps to the top of the

menu system

(Loops to top of this menu)

DISPLAY PROBE

ICON VALUES

Steps through all of the Probe Icons and Displays their

current values

DISPLAY MEMORY

ICON VALUES

Steps through all of the Memory Icons and displays their

current values

DISPLAY STATUS

MESSAGES

Steps through all of the active Message Icons

ERASE

MEMORY

Erases data memory, leaving Net program intact

(Loops to top of this menu)

ML054

Figure 3... -8: LCD (display) Menu Structure

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Pressing the SELECT button selects that menu item and a new level

of menus or results are displayed. A detailed description of the

various menu items and levels follow.

TIP - a good comprehension of this LCD menu structure

can be achieved by close reading of this section... but

better results may be achieved by just `diving in’ and

poking around with the NEXT and SELECT buttons to

develop a feel for the structure. Then read through this

section for the details.

Display Menu Items

Following are descriptions of each of the display menu items

identified in Figure 3... -8. Further details may be found in later

sections detailing the functions described.

TOP MENU:

When the OMP-MODL is powered ON, the Top Menu is

displayed in the LCD. The Top Menu indicates the OMP-MODL

EPROM version on the top line of the LCD (software version

residing in an EPROM memory chip within the OMP-MODL) and

on the bottom line, the current operational mode of the OMP-

MODL. Displayed Modes include:

ENABLED

Indicates the OMP-MODL is currently executing a Program

Net that has been developed with HyperNet and transferred

to the OMP-MODL memory.

STOPPED

The OMP-MODL is not executing a Program Net. Since the

Net is not executing and updating the net, stepping through

various Probe Points will result in values and states that will

not be current.

MEMFULL STOPPED

Data memory within the OMP-MODL has filled and the

execution of the Program Net has stopped. This message

will also display if the Rotary Memory mode is utilized (See

Global icon in Appendix A) and a logging session has been

performed. In Rotary Memory mode, only one logging

session can be maintained in the OMP-MODL memory.

MEMFULL ENABLED

Memory within the OMP-MODL has filled, however

execution of the Program Net is continuing. This mode of

operation may be User selected when alarming/control

functions are to be monitored.... even after the OMP-MODL

memory has filled. This display will only occur if the User

has selected the memory utilization option Log to Full

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Memory and Continue Processing during setup of the

Program Net within HyperNet (Global Icon option).

MEMFULL WRAPPING

Displays when the OMP-MODL Program Net is configured in

the Rotary Memory mode. When memory fills, the OMP-

MODL starts writing over the first collected data. Since the

Program Net is still executing, alarms and control functions

continue to be monitored. Rotary Memory mode is enabled

during setup of the Program Net under the Global Icon.

RCV’ING NET

Displays momentarily during the actual serial upload of of a

Program Net to the OMP-MODL.

NO PROGRAM NET

Displays upon first power up of the OMP-MODL after the

Program Net has been lost. This should only occur after

replacement (or initial installation) of the lithium cell used for

Data Memory backup. The display indicates that a search

for a valid Program Net stored within the OMP-MODL

memory has failed.

In the event that this message displays, check (and replace

if low) the Lithium Cell via the STATUS menu described

below. Then reprogram the OMP-MODL with a new

Program Net.

BAD PROGRAM NET

Displays if an illegal or corrupted Program Net is in memory.

This message should only occur if memory containing the

Program Net has been corrupted or the unit has undergone

a 3-button Initialization which has cleared out the OMP-

MODL Program Net. In the event that this message

displays, reprogram the logger with a new Program Net,

then check (and replace if low) the Lithium Cell via the

STATUS menu described below.

CARD ERROR: MISSING FILE

Displays upon power-up of the OMP-MODL with an

improperly prepared PCMCIA card inserted (MLIM-5

module). The card should be formatted and prepared for

use within the OMP-MODL as described in Chapter 6.

BAD CONFIG

Displays if User selectable switch settings on the MLAD-1 or

any other OMP-MODL Interface Modules do not match the

currently loaded Program Net. The message also identifies

which Interface Module and channel or incompatible. If this

message displays, modify the Program Net to match the

hardware or open the OMP-MODL and examine the switch

settings on the installed Interface Modules and correct the

invalid setting(s).

SYSTEM STATUS

From the Top Menu, pressing the Next button once will advance

the display to System Status. Pressing SELECT while System

3-14

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Status is displayed results in a new level of display. Menu

selections available on this level include:

DATE AND TIME

Press SELECT to display the current Date and Time in the

OMP-MODL Real Time Clock. This is the date and time to

which collected data is referenced. The OMP-MODL date

and time are set from within HyperComm (Chapter 5).

REMAINING MEMORY

Press SELECT to display the number of samples recorded

and the percentage of memory used.

TIP: Depending on the User defined format

for data storage and the actual time and

values being stored, samples will require

varying amounts of memory for storage. For

this reason, use caution when extrapolating

the remaining logging time.

UNIT NAME & ID

Press SELECT to display the programmed OMP-MODL

Name and ID. The OMP-MODL Unit name and ID can be

User assigned through HyperWare (Chapter 5). This ID can

be used for corporate tracking of multiple units, calibration

schedules, etc.

PROGRAM NET NAME

Press SELECT to display the currently loaded Program Net

name. This name is assigned during the development of a

Program Net (Chapter 7).

PROGRAM NET DESCRIPTION

Press SELECT to display a previously programmed

description of the Program Net (above).

SYSTEM SUPPLY VOLTAGE

Press SELECT to display the OMP-MODL supply voltage

and the approximate state of charge of the memory / clock

backup lithium cell. If internal batteries are installed in the

OMP-MODL and an external power supply is also

connected, the displayed Supply Voltage indicated refers to

the greater of the two.

FYI: The displayed Supply Voltage is

measured at an internal node on the power

supply circuitry. Displayed battery voltage is

the voltage of the internal batteries .

External supply voltage will be

approximately 2 volts higher than indicated.

If the Input Range Jumper (see MLCPU-1

section) is set to HI, the External supply

voltage will be approximately 3.5 volts

higher than indicated.

The state of charge display for the lithium cell (used for

memory and clock backup) will display GOOD or LOW. If

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

LOW is displayed, download any desired data memory, then

replace the lithium cell per the instructions in Appendix D.

RETURN TO TOP MENU

Press SELECT to return to the Top Menu display. Press

NEXT to cycle through this level’s menu selections again.

DISPLAY PROBE ICON VALUES

During the construction of a Program Net within HyperNet, the

User can opt to connect Probe Point icons to various nodes

throughout the net. These Probe Point icons allow the User to

view the current values on the nodes to which they are

connected. (Program Net development is described in Chapter 7

and details on the Probe Point icon are included in Appendix A.)

One of the ways that the Probe Point values can be viewed is via

the OMP-MODL front panel LCD, as follows:

FYI: Probe Point is used for the icon name as

connecting these icons to a node on a Net is

somewhat analogous to putting a test meter probe

on the Net nodes and reading a value.

From the Top Menu, pressing the NEXT button twice will

advance the LCD to Display Probe Icon Values. Pressing

SELECT while Display Probe icon Values is on the LCD will shift

the display to a level containing the actual Probe Point values.

The top line of this display is the Probe icon Name assigned to

the icon during construction of the net and the second line is the

value and units.

Repetitively pressing NEXT will step the display through all of the

Probe icons previously programmed into the Program Net. To

return to the Top Menu, press SELECT when Return to Top

Menu is displayed.

Displayed Probe icon values will be updated whenever the net

node is updated. If the OMP-MODL is Stopped (ie not executing

the net), the last calculated node value will be displayed.

TIP: Displaying Probe icon Values while the OMP-MODL

is enabled will slow down the execution of the net. For

higher speed data logging applications (eg sub-second

sampling rates), faster performance can be achieved by

leaving the LCD in a mode where it is not displaying the

time/date, battery state of charge, remaining memory,

Probe icons, Memory Icons , or Net Values,

DISPLAY MEMORY ICON VALUES

In addition to display of Probe icon values (previously described),

the last value stored to any Memory icon within the executing

Program Net can also be displayed on the LCD.

From the Top Menu, pressing the NEXT button three times will

advance the LCD to Display Memory Icon Values. Pressing

SELECT while Display Memory Icon Values is on the LCD will

shift the display to a level containing the actual last logged

values. The top line of this display is the Memory Icon Name

3-16

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

assigned to the icon during construction of the net and the

second line is the last logged value and units.

To return to the Top Menu, press SELECT when the Return to

Top Menu message is displayed.

DISPLAY STATUS MESSAGES

Messages can be sent to the LCD due to OMP-MODL

operational conditions or User programmed Program Net

conditions. To view the active messages; from the Top Menu,

press NEXT five times and then SELECT while the Display

Status Messages menu is displayed. Step through the messages

with the NEXT button and return to the Top Menu by pressing

SELECT when Return to Top Menu is displayed.

Depending on the inputs and programmed conditions within the

currently executing Program Net, User programmed messages

may come and go as the conditions for display are met then not

met over time.

During execution of a Program Net, if the conditions (either

OMP-MODL operational or User defined Program Net) are met

for a message display (eg an alarm conditon occurs), the

message will display on the LCD immediately... overwriting any

current displays. Messages displayed on the LCD will not be

cleared from the LCD when they become False, however they

will be cleared from the internal display queue. Messages will

only be cleared from the LCD if another message is displayed or

if the User changes the LCD (via the Select/Next buttons) in any

way. For additional information on message display capability

from within a Program Net,, refer to the Message icon in

Appendix A.

ERASE MEMORY (VIA DISPLAY SEQUENCE)

Data memory within the OMP-MODL and within an inserted

PCMCIA card can be cleared via the SELECT and NEXT

buttons. To clear memory, from the Top Menu, press NEXT six

times until the message Erase Memory appears on the LCD.

Then press SELECT a total of five times to clear the memory.

Successful erasure of the memory is confirmed with a Memory

has been Erased message.

Note that at any time during this sequence of SELECT button

presses, pressing the NEXT button will abort the Memory Clear

sequence and stored data will be preserved.

Internal OMP-MODL memory and PCMCIA card memory can

also be cleared via a serial communication link. Refer to the

Chapter 5 on HyperComm for details. Additionally, memory can

be cleared using the STOP button (see details in the STOP

button explanation in the MLCPU-1 section)

Status Lights

The Status lights on the ML-DISP duplicate the lights located on the end of

the MLCPU-1 module (discussed in prior section MLCPU-1 Module).

Three light emitting diode (LED) lights are provided on the front panel,

labeled STATUS, ALARM 1 and ALARM 2. The STATUS LED is merely a

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

visual indicator provided for User specified application from within a

Program Net. The ALARM LED’s provide visual indication of the state of the

two output relays contained on the MLCPU-1 module. When the ALARM

LED is ON, the relay contacts are closed.

3-18

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-1; FOUR CHANNEL ANALOG INTERFACE MODULE

Overview:

The MLIM-1 is a four channel add-on Interface Module for use in conjunction

with the OMP-MODL System Base.

NOTE: The MLAD-1 module of the System Base

includes the functionality of the MLIM-1 in additon to its

other functions. This section’s configuration and

operation instructions pertain to both the MLIM-1 add-on

module and the MLAD-1 component of the System Base.

Each of the four channels can be individually programmed for any

combination of the following signal types and input ranges with HyperWare

software (via HyperNet) and hardware Configuration Switches (located on

the Interface Module).

Thermocouple:

Type

Color (USA)

white/red

yellow/red

purple/red

blue/red

Range (F)

-60 to 1400F

32 to 2500F

Range (C)

-50 to 760C

0 to 1370C

-150 to 1830F -100 to 1000C

-250 to 750F

32 to 1830F

32 to 3182F

-160 to 400C

0 to 1000C

0 to 1750C

black/red

Table 3... -1: Thermocouple input types and ranges

DC Voltage:

Full Scale (FS) ranges:

Icon

Full Scale Input Ranges

VDC-LO

+/- 20mV

+/-200mV

+/-5 V

+/-40mV

+/-1V

+/-50mV

+/-2V

+/-60mV

+/-100mV

VDC-MED

VDC-HI

+/- 10V

+/-15V

+/- 3V

+/-30V

Table 3... -2: DC Voltage input ranges

Input Impedance for the 5V, 10V, and 30V ranges is >2.5Megohm.

All other range’s input impedance is > 10 Megohm.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

DC Current:

Full Scale (FS) ranges:

Icon

Full Scale Input Ranges

mA-LO

+/-200uA

+/-400uA +/-500uA +/-1.0mA

+/-2.0mA +/-11 mA

+/-22mA

Table 3... -3: DC Current input ranges

Input resistance for all current ranges is a 100 ohm precision shunt.

Module Installation:

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions of the Interface Module onto the System Base.

I/O Wiring Terminal

Strip

Module Address (Layer) Switches

Inter-Module Connection bus

OFF

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

ml051

Side Retaining Screw holes

Figure 3... -9: MLIM-1 Module Address Switches

I/O Module Layer Requirements / Limitations:

The MLIM-1 module can be installed in any of the five I/O Module positions

(Figure 3... -4). The module layer address must be set on the module to

correspond to the layer position into which the module is installed.

This address is programmed into the module through the use of the three

Module Address Switch banks (Figure 3... -9). Each switch bank contains 5

switches. Note the marking on the circuit board identifying address rows for

Module Layers 2 through 5. Set one switch in each of the 3 banks ON

corresponding to a module layer determined above. Each switch bank

should have only ONE switch ON and the other four switches OFF.

3-20

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Module Address (Layer) Switch banks

OFF - ON

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

ml051

Figure 3... -10: Example Address setting for Module Layer Position 4

CAUTION: The switch banks may have different numbering than the circuit

board... insure that the marking on the circuit board is followed... not the

marking on the switch banks.

NOTE: The MLAD-1 module does not have Module Address Switches as

the MLAD-1 is always in Module Address Layer Position 1.

Ground Ref

jumpers

Fuse (one per

channel)

OFF

Chan A

Chan B

Chan C

Chan D

Configuration Switches

(one per channel)

I/O Wiring Terminal

Strip

ml013

Figure 3... -11: Channel configuration switches within the MLIM-1

Module

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Hardware Input Signal Configuration Switches:

Four sets of Input Configuration Switches are provided for each of the four

channels (Figure 3... -11). Through the use of these switches, various types

of signals can be directly fed into the OMP-MODL eliminating the need for

User supplied external precision dividers, shunts and other circuitry.

Although for most applications, an in-depth understanding of the function of

these switches is not required, a simplified schematic of the input section of

the MLIM-1 is provided in Figure 3... -12. As can be seen in this schematic,

different combinations of the switches interject voltage dividers and shunts

into the input stage of the Interface Module.

2.49M

SW1

FUSE

SW2

SW3

SW4

AMP

0-30

0-10

4-20mA

Range

GROUND REFERENCE JUMPER

ML014

22K

Figure 3... -12: Simplified schematic of input section of MLIM-1

and MLAD-1 Modules

The following reference chart provides the necessary information for

configuration of the input switches. The switch settings are read by the

OMP-MODL during a query of the hardware configuration (from within

HyperNet) so the User is not burdened with keeping notes of the current

Module configuration. Improper setting of the switches will result in a `Bad

Configuration’ message on the LCD upon power-up of the OMP-MODL. In

the event that this message displays, check the switch settings per Table 3...

-4 and correct the conflict.

3-22

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Input / Range

SW 1 SW2

SW3

SW4

Thermocouples

OFF

VDC up through +/-2 VDC

VDC up through +/-10 VDC

VDC up through +/-30 VDC

All Current (mADC) Ranges

OFF

Table 3... -4: MLIM-1 configuration switch settings

MLIM-1 Channel Configuration via Software:

When a MLIM-1 channel is configured as a particular type of input via the

module configuration switches, the configuration will be automatically

detected during the development of a Program Net for the OMP-MODL.

Software input range configuration and utilization of the MLIM-1’s channels

in a Program Net is covered in Chapter 7 and within the Master Icon Listing

in Appendix A.

Ground Ref

jumpers

Fuse (one per

channel)

OFF

Chan A

Chan B

Chan C

Chan D

Configuration Switches

(one per channel)

I/O Wiring Terminal

Strip

ml013

Figure 3... -13: Channel configuration switches within the MLIM-1

and MLAD-1 Modules

Input Overcurrent Fuses:

Each channel is protected by a 125mA fuse as shown in Figure 3... -12

(circuit) and Figure 3... -13 (physical location on module). This fuse will

protect the module from overcurrent surges received from malfunctioning or

improperly connected sensors and transmitters.

In the event that a channel on a module quits responding with proper values,

it may be an indication that this protective fuse has blown. The fuse can be

removed from the circuit and checked for continuity with an ohm-meter

and/or replaced with a Littelfuse P/N: 273.125 fuse available from Omega

Engineering Incorporated or many electronic distributors.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Commonly, this fuse is blown during installation of 4-

20mA current channels where the power supply powering

the 4-20mA transmitter is accidently shorted directly

across the logger input channel. To avoid this

inconvenience, always check wiring prior to powering up

system power supplies.

MLIM-1; THERMOCOUPLE APPLICATION

Thermocouple Connection:

To utilize an MLIM-1 channel as a thermocouple input, configure that

channel’s Interface Module Configuration Switch per Table 3... -4. Channels

configured as thermocouple inputs utilize three terminal strip connections

per input; Positive lead, Negative lead, and Shield.

Connect the thermocouple positive and negative (red in USA) leads to the

correct pair of terminals on the module terminal strip. Refer to Chapter 7 for

steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring printout for use in making field

wiring connections.

Thermo-

couple Icon

Terminal Strip

ML055

Thermocouple

Lo (Red)

Shield

Figure 3... -14: Thermocouple (and optional Shield) terminal strip connection

Polarity is critical.

Shielded thermocouple wire is recommended in electrically noisy

environments for optimum signal protection. If shielded wire is used, a

ground wire should be run from the MLAD-1 module Chassis Ground

(terminal strip connection #16) to an earth ground connection to conduct

away noise picked up by the thermocouple shield (Figure 2-8). Only one

ground wire is required as all of the Shield terminal strip connections are

interconnected within the logger and routed to the MLAD-1 Chassis Ground

terminal.

NOTE: Do not ground the shield wire at the sensor end away from the OMP-

MODL.

3-24

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Thermocouple Application Notes:

Cold Junction Compensation (CJC): For thermocouple measurements,

the temperature of the terminal strip connections is required in the voltage to

temperature conversion equation used by the OMP-MODL. This

temperature is measured by the CJC sensor located in the MLAD-1 module.

Any differential temperature from the metal terminal strip connections to the

CJC sensor on the MLAD-1 circuit board will result in direct measurement

errors.

The MLAD-1 is thermally designed to provide good CJC sensor vs terminal

strip temperature tracking however, to minimize this potential error, avoid

installations or effects that will induce extreme temperature differential. The

most accurate readings will be achieved when the OMP-MODL has been

allowed to temperature stabilize. In rapidly changing temperature

environments, additional accuracy can be achieved if the OMP-MODL is

housed within another enclosure providing better temperature equalization

throughout the system.

DIFFERENTIAL POTENTIAL: to minimize current loop induced errors, use

isolated type thermocouples (ie thermocouples that are not in electrical

contact with a conductive surface to which they are attached) or insure that

all thermocouple junctions are at ground potential. Insure that input voltages

do not exceed 3.0V above or below circuit ground (maximum common mode

voltage).

MLIM-1; DC VOLTAGE APPLICATION

The MLIM-1 can support three different major ranges (and a multitude of sub-

ranges) of analog DC voltage input depending on the channel’s hardware

Configuration Switch setting (See Table 3... -4). To utilize an MLIM-1 channel as a

DC Voltage input, set that channel’s Configuration Switch per the Table for the

desired input signal range.

VDC- Lo

Range Icon

As shown in Figure 3... -12, when DC-MED or DC-HI are selected with the hardware

Configuration Switches, front-end divider circuitry is enabled. This circuitry

attenuates the input signal to a range that can be handled by the MLIM-1

instrumentation amplifier section.

TIP: For best accuracy and absolute resolution, utilize

the lowest range possible that will cover the input signal’s

dynamic range without over-ranging.

Signal Connection (all Ranges):

Interface Module channels configured as VDC inputs provide three terminal

strip connections per input; Positive lead, Negative lead, and Shield.

Connect the VDC signal positive and negative leads to the correct pair of

terminals on the module terminal strip (Figure 3... -15). Refer to Chapter 7

for steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring printout for use in making field

wiring connections.

VDC-

Medium

Range Icon

Observe polarity or the output signal will be reversed.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

To minimize noise pickup on sensor wiring between the OMP-MODL and the

end sensor or signal source, 18 to 22 AWG shielded, twisted pair wire is

recommended.

Shielded Twisted

Pair Line

Terminal Strip

10 11 12

VDC-High

Range Icon

ml141

Shield

Figure 3... -15: VDC signal (and optional shield) terminal strip connection

FYI: Shielded wire minimizes the amount of noise picked

up by the internal conductors carrying the signals by

providing an `electrical shell’ or Faraday cage around the

internal conductors.

Twisted pair wiring exposes both conductors equally to

the ambient electrical noise. This common-mode type

noise is easier to reject by the Interface Modules input

signal conditioning circuitry than un-balanced (or

differential) noise.

Shielding and/or twisted pair wire is especially recommended in electrically

noisy environments for optimum signal protection. If shielded wire is used, a

ground wire should be run from the MLAD-1 module Chassis Ground

(terminal strip connection #16) to an earth ground connection to conduct

away noise picked up by the thermocouple shield (Figure 2-8). Only one

ground wire is required as all of the Shield terminal strip connections are

interconnected within the logger and routed to the MLAD-1 Chassis Ground

terminal.

NOTE: Do not ground the signal wiring shield conductor at the sensor end

(the end away from the OMP-MODL) as this can induce additional noise into

the sensor wiring..

3-26

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

APPLICATION NOTES; DC Voltage Channels

Channel Isolation:

The negative terminal of MLIM-1 channels configured as DC

Voltage inputs are isolated from the OMP-MODL circuit ground by a

22Kohm resistor (see Figure 3... -12).

Common Mode Input Range Considerations:

To prevent saturation of the input amplifier stages and erroneous

readings, no voltages should be applied to any input terminals that

are greater than 4.0V above or below circuit ground. If the signal

being measured is not connected to the OMP-MODL circuit ground

(ie `isolated’ supplies are used), common mode input voltages up to

32 V can be accepted. Voltages above this level can be lethal and

should not be applied to the OMP-MODL. Supply isolation can be

achieved by allowing the OMP-MODL to run from its internal

batteries (rather than an external source).

Multiple Measurement Nodes on a Circuit:

When measuring different voltage points from a common circuit with

multiple channels (of one or more Interface Modules), measurement

errors from induced ground currents can exist. Single ended

measurements may be required. Consult the factory for application

assistance.

MLIM-1; DC CURRENT (MA-LO) APPLICATION

The MLIM-1 can accept DC Current within the ranges specified in Table 3... -3. To

utilize an MLIM-1 channel as a DC Current input, set that channel’s Configuration

Switch per Table 3... -4 as a mA-LO Channel.

As shown in Figure 3... -12, when mA-DC is selected with the hardware

Configuration Switches, a precision 100 ohm burden resistor is enabled. The input

signal is measured as a voltage across the shunt resistor.

mA-Lo Icon

TIP: For best accuracy and absolute resolution, utilize

the lowest range possible that will cover the input signal’s

dynamic range without over-ranging.

Signal Connection (all Current Ranges):

Interface Module channels configured as mA-LO inputs provide three

terminal strip connections per input; Positive lead, Negative lead, and

Shield.

Connect the mADC signal positive and negative leads to the correct pair of

terminals on the module terminal strip (Figure 3... -16).

Refer to Chapter 7; HyperNet Programming for steps to generate a

Terminal Strip Wiring printout for use in making field wiring connections.

Observe polarity or the output signal will be reversed.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

4-20mA

Panel Meter

+ XTMR -

Terminal Strip

4-20mA

+ XTMR -

Controller

Power

Supply

GND

ml057

Figure 3... -16: Terminal strip connections for multiple 4-20mA inputs

To minimize noise pickup on sensor wiring between the OMP-MODL and the

end sensor or signal source, 18 to 22 AWG shielded, twisted pair wire is

recommended. At the low current levels input to the MLIM-1, voltage drop

in signal wiring is not a concern, however for extremely long runs, a voltage

drop analysis should be performed for the entire loop and if necessary larger

gauge wire should be used.

FYI: Typically, with current signals (in contrast to low

level voltage signals), noise pickup will be less due to the

low impedances involved in the circuit. However, in real-

world applications, one should attempt to minimize noise

on signal wires whenever possible... remember, Mother

Nature loves to throw surprise parties.

Shielded wire minimizes the amount of noise picked up

by the internal conductors carrying the signals by

providing an `electrical shell’ or Faraday cage around the

internal conductors.

Twisted pair wiring exposes both conductors equally to

the ambient electrical noise. This common-mode type

noise is easier to reject by the Interface Modules input

signal conditioning circuitry than un-balanced (or

differential) noise.

Shielding and/or twisted pair wire is especially recommended in electrically

noisy environments for optimum signal protection. If shielded wire is used, a

ground wire should be run from the MLAD-1 module Chassis Ground

(terminal strip connection #16) to an earth ground connection to conduct

away noise picked up by the wiring shield (Figure 2-8). Only one ground

wire is required as all of the Shield terminal strip connections are

3-28

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

interconnected within the logger and routed to the MLAD-1 Chassis Ground

terminal.

NOTE: Do not ground the signal wiring shield conductor at the sensor end

(the end away from the OMP-MODL) as this can induce additional noise into

the sensor wiring..

APPLICATION NOTES; DC Current Channels

Channel Isolation:

The negative terminal of MLIM-1 channels configured as DC Current

inputs are isolated from the OMP-MODL circuit ground by a 22Kohm

resistor (see Figure 3... -12).

Common Mode Input Range Considerations:

To prevent saturation of the input amplifier stages and erroneous

readings, no voltages should be applied to any input terminals that

are greater than 4.0V above or below OMP-MODL circuit ground.

In wiring multiple 4-20mA transmitters to the OMP-MODL through

an MLIM-1 channel, this 4.0V common mode level must not be

exceeded. Figure 3... -16 shows an acceptable method to connect

multiple transmitters running from a common power supply to

several channels on an MLIM-1 Interface Module channel without

exceeding this spec.

A simple method to comply with this spec is to insure that all

negative inputs (-) on channels configured as mA-LO inputs are

directly connected to the GROUND (-) terminal of the power supply

used for excitation of the 4 to 20 mA loop (eg the Omega

Engineering RPS-1, Rechargeable Power Supply). This will insure

that the voltage developed across the 100 ohm resistor internal to

the MLIM-1 mA-LO input channel will never exceed 2 VDC (ie 20mA

X 100 ohms = 2 VDC) relative to any channel’s (-) negative terminal.

In Figure 3... -16, the voltage developed between node [A] to [GND]

and node [B] to [GND] will never exceed 2VDC (in normal

operation).

Multiple Measurement Nodes on a Circuit:

When measuring different voltage points from a common circuit with

multiple channels (of one or more Interface Modules), measurement

errors from induced ground currents can exist. Single ended

measurements may be required. Consult the factory for application

assistance.

Input Overcurrent Fuses:

Each channel is protected by a 125mA fuse as shown in Figure 3... -12

(circuit) and Figure 3... -13 (physical location on module). This fuse will

protect the module from overcurrent surges received from malfunctioning or

improperly connected sensors and transmitters.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

In the event that a channel on a module quits responding with proper values,

it may be an indication that this protective fuse has blown. The fuse can be

removed from the circuit and checked for continuity with an ohm-meter

and/or replaced with a Littelfuse P/N: 273.050 fuse available from Omega

Engineering Incorporated or many electronic distributors.

3-30

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-2; DIGITAL INTERFACE MODULE OVERVIEW

Overview:

The MLIM-2 Interface Module provides four input channels and four output

channels on a single module. Each of the four input channels can be

individually programmed for any combination of Event input, Count input, or

Frequency input. The four output channels provide current limited nominal

5VDC output. Configuration of the module is done from within HyperNet in

HyperWare.

Module Installation:

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions of the Interface Module onto the System Base.

Module Address (Layer) Switch bank

OFF

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

ml051

Figure 3... -17: MLIM-2 Module Address Switch Bank

I/O Module Layer Requirements / Limitations:

The MLIM-2 module can be installed in any of the five I/O Module positions

(Figure 3... -4). The module layer address must be set on the module to

correspond to the layer position into which the module is installed.

This address is programmed into the module through the use of the Module

Address Switch bank (Figure 3... -17). The switch bank contains 5 switches.

Note the marking on the circuit board identifying address rows for Module

Layers 2 through 5. Set one switch in the bank ON corresponding to a

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

module layer determined above. The switch bank should have only ONE

switch ON and the other four switches OFF.

CAUTION: The switch bank may have different numbering than the circuit

board... insure that the marking on the circuit board is followed... not the

marking on the switch banks.

Hardware Input Configuration Switches:

No hardware input configuration switches are provided on the MLIM-2. All

configuration is done via the HyperNet software (with the exception of the

Module Address setting discussed above).

Software Configuration of the MLIM-2:

The MLIM-2 module is completely configured on a channel by channel basis

from within the HyperNet software. This software configuration and

utilization of the various MLIM-2 channels in a Program Net is covered in

Chapter 7 and within the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A.

MLIM-2; EVENT INPUT APPLICATION

The Event function of the MLIM-2 allows for the recording of the state of an ON/OFF

type input. Configured as an Event input, a channel will accept a powered input

signal (ranging from 0 to a maximum of 15VDC) or a contact closure (dry contact)

input.

Figure 3... -

18: Event

icon (MLIM-2)

For powered input signals, the MLIM-2 Event function defines

signals less than 1VDC as a Low level and greater than 4VDC

(15VDC max) as a High level.

For contact closure type inputs, power is automatically supplied

from the MLIM-2 channel circuitry via a 100Kohm pull-up

resistor (R1 in

Figure 3... -22).

Channel input impedance is greater than 30K ohm.

A 40mS debounce circuit can be enabled via software which can be used to filter out

`contact bounce’ (Refer to the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A for details).

MLIM-2; COUNTER INPUT APPLICATION

The Counter function of the MLIM-2 provides an accumulating total of signal

transitions received at its input.

Configured as a Counter type input, a channel will accept a powered input signal

ranging from 0 to a maximum of 15VDC or a contact closure (dry contact) input.

Figure 3... -

19:

Counter

icon (MLIM-

For powered input signals, the MLIM-2 Counter function defines

signals less than 1VDC as a Low level and greater than 4VDC

(15VDC max) as a High level.

For contact closure type inputs, power is automatically supplied

from the MLIM-2 channel circuitry.

In Counter mode, 16,777,216 transitions can be received before the counter will roll-

over to 0 and begin counting up again. This may be a consideration during the

3-32

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

implementation of a Counter channel within a Program Net and is covered in the

Master Icon Listing, Appendix A.

Channel input impedance is greater than 30K ohm.

A 40mS debounce circuit can be enabled via software which can be used to filter out

`contact bounce’ (see below).

Event / Counter Input Signal Connections:

To utilize an MLIM-2 channel as an Event or Counter input, connect the

input signal positive lead to an Input terminal (Chan A, B, C, or D) and the

negative lead to one of the four Common terminals on the module terminal

strip (Figure 3... -20). Note that all of the four Common terminals are

interconnected and connect directly to the OMP-MODL circuit ground. Refer

to Chapter 7 for steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring printout for use in

making field wiring connections.

Contact Closure Application

Contact Closure

ML058

Isolation from Relay contact closure

Powered Signal Application

TTL or CMOS

15VDC Max

VDC

Lamp

Figure 3... -20: Contact closure and Powered type Event or Counter signal input

connections

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

CAUTION: Note that a direct connection exists between

the common (-) terminal on all four channels of the MLIM-

2 (

Figure 3... -22). When connecting to multiple event or

counter signal sources sharing a common ground or

reference, insure that the source’s ground or reference is

connected to the terminal strip `common’ terminal to

prevent shorting out of the source signal and possible

damage to the MLIM-2.

For most counter and event applications, shielding is not necessary due to

the relatively low input impedance of the channel and the high noise

immunity of the MLIM-2 channel input.

MLIM-2; FREQUENCY INPUT APPLICATION

An MLIM-2 channel configured as a Frequency type input can measure input

frequencies ranging from 5Hz to in excess of 20KHz. The channel will accurately

measure frequencies of sine, square, or sine approximating input waveforms with

peak to peak amplitudes of 300mVDC to 15VDC. Channel input impedance is

greater than 30K ohm within the specified input range.

Figure 3... -

21:

Frequency

icon

The MLIM-2 incorporates an AC coupled front-end amplifier for use with low

amplitude signals ( see AMP inFigure 3... -22).

(MLIM-2)

V+

Current Limited Output Driver

Count / Event Signal

Debounce RC

Software Controlled

Debounce Circuit

COM

N/C

Amplified Frequency

AMP

N/C

ML059

COM

N/C

COM

HyperLogger

Circuit Ground

Figure 3... -22: Simplified schematic of MLIM-2 input channel (single

channel shown)

3-34

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Frequency Signal Connection:

To utilize an MLIM-2 channel as a Frequency input, connect the input signal

positive lead to one of the four Input terminals (Chan A, B, C, or D) and the

negative lead to one of the four Common terminals on the module terminal

strip (Figure 3... -23). Note that all of the four Common terminals are

interconnected and connect directly to the OMP-MODL circuit ground..

Refer to Chapter 7 for steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring printout for

use in making field wiring connections.

CAUTION: Note that a direct connection exists between

the common (-) terminal on all four channels of the MLIM-

2 (

Figure 3... -22). When connecting to multiple frequency

sources sharing a common ground or reference, insure

that the source’s ground or reference is connected to the

terminal strip `common’ terminal to prevent shorting out

of the frequency signal and possible damage to the

MLIM-2.

For Frequency recording applications with small signal amplitude, high

frequencies, long lead length and/or in noisy environments, twisted pair wire

will provide extra noise immunity. In extremely noisy applications, shielded

wire may be required. If shielded wire is used, the shield at the OMP-MODL

end should be connected to an external earth ground (Figure 3... -23) or if

available, a grounded Shield connection provided on another type installed

interface module (such as the MLIM-1).

NOTE: Do not ground the shield wire at the end away from the OMP-MODL.

Terminal Strip

Shielded Twisted

Pair Lead

1 2 3 4 5

Frequency

Source A

ML060

Frequency

Source B

Shield

Earth Ground

Figure 3... -23: Frequency input terminal strip connections (two inputs shown)

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-2; DIGITAL OUTPUT APPLICATION

The MLIM-2 provides four channels dedicated as outputs. These channels can be

configured for functions such as alarming. The output is a current limited voltage

signal with the voltage/current characteristics shown in Figure 3... -24. As shown,

with a light load, the output voltage maintains approximately 4+ VDC but as the

Digital

Output icon

(MLIM-2)

HL023

Current (milliAmps)

Figure 3... -24: MLIM-2 Digital output drive characteristics

current draw increases, current limiting occurs and the output voltage droops. The

output can be short circuited continuously without damage to the output drive

circuitry, but the OMP-MODL battery life will be drastically reduced.

Note that the when the Output is OFF, it is merely floating, ie it is not driven to a

ground (or shorted to ground) potential. This may be a consideration when driving

TTL or other type inputs. A pull-down resistor (eg 10K) can be added on the terminal

strip connections from the output to the common to provide a low resistance OFF

state if necessary. Keep in mind if a pull-down resistor is added, that this resistor will

consume power when the Output is ON.

3-36

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Digital Output Signal Connections:

To utilize an MLIM-2 Output channel, connect the load positive lead to an

Output terminal (Chan E, F, G, or H) and the load negative lead to one of

the four Common terminals on the module terminal strip (Figure 3... -25).

Note that all of the four Common terminals are interconnected and connect

directly to the OMP-MODL circuit ground. Refer to Chapter 7 for steps to

generate a Terminal Strip Wiring printout for use in making field wiring

connections.

Terminal Strip

LOAD

ML124

LOAD

Figure 3... -25: MLIM-2 Digital output terminal strip connections

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-4; RTD / RESISTANCE INTERFACE MODULE OVERVIEW

Overview

The MLIM-4 is a four channel Interface Module for use in the OMP-MODL

System Base. Each of the four channels can be individually programmed

for any combination of RTD (100 ohm or 1000 ohm), Resistance or

Thermistor input via the HyperWare software (HyperNet).

Additionally, for RTD and resistance measurements, 2, 3, and 4-Wire

configurations can be selected. With 3 and 4-wire configurations, the

resistance due to the extension wires is minimized. With 3 or 4-wire

configuration, each sensor connection will require two input channels.

Module Installation:

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions of the Interface Module onto the System Base.

I/O Wiring Terminal

Strip

Module Address (Layer) Switches

Inter-Module Connection bus

OFF

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

ml051

Side Retaining Screw holes

Figure 3... -26: MLIM-4 Module Address Switches

I/O Module Layer Requirements / Limitations:

The MLIM-1 module can be installed in any of the five I/O Module positions

(Figure 3... -4). The module layer address must be set on the module to

correspond to the layer position into which the module is installed.

This address is programmed into the module through the use of the three

Module Address Switch banks (Figure 3... -26 and Figure 3... -27). Each

switch bank contains 5 switches. Note the marking on the circuit board

identifying address rows for Module Layers 2 through 5. Set one switch in

each of the 3 banks ON corresponding to a module layer determined above.

3-38

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Each switch bank should have only ONE switch ON and the other four

Module Address (Layer) Switch banks

OFF - ON

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

ml051

Figure 3... -27: Example Address setting for Module Layer Position 4

switches OFF.

CAUTION: The switch banks may have different numbering than the circuit

board... insure that the marking on the circuit board is followed... not the

marking on the switch banks.

Hardware Input Configuration Switches:

No hardware input configuration switches are provided on the MLIM-4. All

configuration is done via the HyperNet software.

Software Configuration of the MLIM-4

The MLIM-4 module is completely configured on a channel by channel basis

from within the HyperNet software. This software configuration and

utilization of the various MLIM-4 channels in a Program Net is covered in

overview in Chapter 6, within the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A, and with

specific detail in this document.

When the MLIM-4 module is detected in a OMP-MODL after clicking on the

New Program button from within HyperNet, four icons representing the

MLIM-4 input channels will display on the screen. The icons will display as

2-wire RTD inputs as the default. These icons can be switched to

Resistance or Thermistor inputs by double-clicking on the icon to open the

configuration dialog then on the Change button.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-4; RTD INPUT APPLICATION

The RTD function of the MLIM-4 allows for the input of Platinum RTD’s with any of

the following characteristics:

100 or 1000 ohm @ 0’ C

European (0.0385) or American (0.0392) alpha coefficient curve

2, 3, or 4-wire configuration

RTD Input

The actual temperature is calculated from the resistance and can be output in either

degrees C or F. Two input temperature ranges are provided for maximizing span

and ultimate resolution of the readings. The RTD element resistance is measured

using a constant current ratiometric technique which provides excellent accuracy

and stability over time and temperature.

Refer to the Excitation Current Table for current levels utilized in the excitation of

the RTD elements.

MLIM-4; THERMISTOR INPUT APPLICATION

The Thermistor function of the MLIM-4 allows for the input of 10,000 ohm @ 25C

NTC thermistors conforming to the Fenwall Curve 16 or equivalent RT curve.

The actual temperature is calculated from the resistance and can be output in either

degrees C or F. Four input temperature ranges are provided for maximizing span

and ultimate resolution of the readings. The Thermistor element resistance is

measured using a constant current ratiometric technique which provides excellent

stability over time and temperature. Due to the high resistance vs temperature ratio,

only 2-wire configuration is provided (and required).

Thermistor

Input

Refer to the Excitation Current Table for current levels utilized in the excitation of

the Thermistor element under test.

MLIM-4; RESISTANCE INPUT APPLICATION

The Resistance function of the MLIM-4 can measure resistances ranging from 200

ohm to 400,000 ohm full scale. 2, 3, or 4-wire configurations can be used depending

on absolute accuracy requirements.

Resistance

Input

Twelve input resistance ranges are provided for maximizing span and ultimate

resolution of the readings. The resistance is measured using a constant current

ratiometric technique which provides excellent stability over time and temperature.

Refer to the Excitation Current Table for current levels utilized in the excitation of

the resistance elements being measured.

MLIM-4; INPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION METHODS:

For all three signal types, RTD, thermistor, and resistance, a ratiometric resistance

measurement technique is used. In the case of the RTD and thermistor

measurements, a software conversion is then used to convert this resistance into

temperature.

In measuring the resistance of a distant element with a conventional 2-wire

connection configuration, the resistance of the lead wires running from the module

terminal strip to the actual sensing element itself will add resistance and

corresponding error. The magnitude of these errors depends on the resistance of the

lead wires which is a function of wire gauge, temperature, and any connection

resistance. If the resistance is small relative to the resistance being measured, this

3-40

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

additive lead wire resistance can be ignored (eg in thermistor or Kohm resistance

measurements). However, in applications of RTDs or lower resistance ranges this

lead wire resistance can add up to substantial measurement errors... especially if

long runs or lighter gauge lead wire is used. For example, in a 100 ohm RTD, 0.4

ohms of lead wire resistance would translates to a reading error of 1 Deg C.

To minimize these lead wire induced errors, the MLIM-4 supports 3-wire and 4-wire

connection methods. Connection diagrams and descriptions for each of the wiring

methods follow.

2-Wire Configuration

The 2-wire configuration is easiest to use and allows for utilization of all four

input channels of the MLIM-4 as individual channels. All three input types,

RTD, thermistor, and resistance can be measured with the 2-wire technique.

For short runs, heavier gauge lead wires and/or higher resistance

measurements, the 2-wire technique will provide excellent performance with

minimal error.

2-Wire

Config

Calculating Lead Wire Effects

To calculate resistance errors induced by lead wires in a 2-wire

configuration:

1. Estimate the total length of the lead wire to be used.

2. Multiply this length by the resistance per foot of the wire

to be used. Complete wire tables are available from wire

manufacturers and in many electronic reference books.

For general reference, an abbreviated table is included

below.

Note that wire resistances are typically given per 1000

foot.

3. Assess the effects of this resistance on the required

accuracy. For RTD applications, tables are available

from the manufacturer that correlate RTD element

resistance to degrees over the usable range. As a

general guideline, a 100 ohm RTD will have a 1 Degree

C change for every 0.36 ohms, a 1000 ohm RTD will

have a 1 degree C change for every 3.6 ohms (hence the

increasing popularity of the 1000 ohm RTD).

Wire Gauge

ohms per 1000 ft

@ 25C (77F)

41.6

@ 65C (149F)

30.2

19.0

11.9

7.5

26.2

16.5

10.4

6.5

4.1

4.7

Table 5: Typical Copper Wire resistance

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

2-Wire Terminal Strip Connections:

The MLIM-4 module is provided with a 12 position terminal strip.

Each MLIM-4 input channel utilizes 3 of the 12 terminals (1-2-3, 4-5-

6, 7-8-9, 10-11-12). Connect the input signal to the first two of the

three input terminals (1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11) on the terminal strip. A

wire jumper must then be installed from the second to the third

terminal (2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12).

Refer to Chapter 6 for steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring

printout after construction of a Program Net for use in making field

wiring connections.

10 11 12

RTD Element

Jumper

Connect Shield to an Earth Ground

Cable Shield

ML125

Figure 3... -28; 2-Wire Configuration

For long lead wire runs and in applications in electrically noisy

environments, it is recommended that twisted pair and/or shielded

wire be used. If shielded wire is used, the shield at the OMP-MODL

end should be connected to an external earth ground (Figure 3... -

28) or if available, a grounded Shield connection provided on

another type installed interface module (such as the MLIM-1).

3-Wire Configuration

The 3-wire configuration is used in applications where the lead wire effects

calculated as above will have a significant error inducing effect on the

resistance measurement. The 3-wire configuration requires two input

channels (A and B or C and D) to implement. From within the HyperNet

Window, double-clicking Channel A or C icons displays a dialog and allows

for selection of 2, 3, or 4-wire connection. When 3 -wire is selected, a

second corresponding icon (Channel B or D) is removed as this second

channel is required for the 3 -wire measurement.

3-Wire

Config

3-Wire Compensation Theory:

With a 3-wire configuration, the resistance of one of the lead wires is

measured, doubled and then subtracted out of the measured total

element plus lead wire circuit resistance. The 3-wire configuration,

as the name implies, requires the use of three discrete wires from

the module terminal strip to the element. Two of the leads connect

to one common end of the element and the other lead connects to

the other end of the element. The 3-wire configuration provides

3-42

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

nearly the same level of error compensation as the 4-wire

configuration with one less wire.

Due to the fact that only one of the lead wires resistance is actually

measured and the other lead wire is assumed to match, in using the

3-wire configuration, it is important that both lead wires used for the

excitation current (connected to terminals 1 & 2, or 7 & 8 and

opposite ends of the element) are of the same approximate length,

same gauge, and operating at the same temperature. The third lead

(connected to terminal 4 or 10) can be of lighter gauge if desired as

a very low current flows through it.

3-Wire Terminal Strip Connections:

As can be seen in the 3-Wire Wiring Diagram, each channel

3rd Wire used as SENSE lead

10 11 12

RTD Element

Jumpers

Connect Shield to an Earth Ground

Cable Shield

ML126

Figure 3... -29: 3-Wire Configuration

requires 6 of the 12 terminals. Channel A uses terminals 1 through

6, and Channel C uses terminals 7 through 12.

Two matching gauge Excitation wires should connect from opposite

ends of the element and to terminals 1-2 or 7-8 on the module

terminal strip. A third Sense wire then connects from the element

(sharing the connection with a lead from terminal 1 or 7 on the

terminal strip) to terminal location 4 or 10. Two wire jumpers must

then be installed connecting terminals 2-3 and 5-6 for Channel A

and 8-9 and 11-12 for Channel C.

Refer to Chapter 6 for steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring

printout after construction of a Program Net for use in making field

wiring connections.

For long lead wire runs and in applications in electrically noisy

environments, it is recommended that twisted pair and/or shielded

wire be used. If shielded wire is used, the shield at the OMP-MODL

end should be connected to an external earth ground (Figure 3... -

29) or if available, a grounded Shield connection provided on

another type installed interface module (such as the MLIM-1).

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

4-Wire Configuration

The 4-wire configuration is used in applications where the lead wire effects

calculated as above will have a significant error inducing effect on the

resistance measurement. The 4-wire configuration provides the best

compensation for lead wire resistance at the expense of running a 4th lead.

The 4-wire configuration requires two input channels (A and B or C and D) to

implement. From within the HyperNet Window, double-clicking Channel A

or C icons displays a dialog and allows for selection of 2, 3, or 4-wire

connection. When 4-wire is selected, a second corresponding icon (Channel

B or D) is removed as this second channel is required for the 4-wire

measurement.

4-Wire

Config

4-Wire Compensation Theory:

With a 4-wire configuration, the excitation current flows to and from

the element through one pair of leads. The actual voltage

developed across the element is then measured using a second pair

of Sense leads that conduct a very small amount of current (hence

adding negligible I * R voltage measurement error) .

The 4-wire configuration, as the name implies, requires the use of

four discrete wires from the module terminal strip to the element.

Two of the leads connect to one end of the element and the other

two to the other end of the element.

Due to the fact that the excitation current flows through a separate

pair of leads, wire gauge, temperature effects, and connection

resistance has no effect on the accuracy of the readings. The

Sense leads (connected to terminals 4-5 or 10-11) can be of lighter

gauge if desired as a very low current flows through them.

4-Wire Terminal Strip Connections:

As can be seen in the 4-Wire Wiring Diagram, each channel

requires 6 of the 12 terminals. Channel A uses terminals 1 through

6, and Channel C uses terminals 7 through 12.

The Excitation wires connect from opposite ends of the element and

to terminals 1-2 or 7-8 on the terminal strip. A second pair of Sense

wires then connects from opposite ends of the element to terminals

4-5 or 10-11. A wire jumper must then be installed connecting

terminals 2-3 for Channel A and 8-9 for Channel C.

Refer to Chapter 6 for steps to generate a Terminal Strip Wiring

printout after construction of a Program Net for use in making field

wiring connections.

3-44

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Excitation leads

10 11 12

RTD Element

Jumper

Sense leads

Connect Shield to an Earth Ground

ML127

Cable Shield

Figure 3... -30: 4-Wire Configuration

For long lead wire runs and in applications in electrically noisy

environments, it is recommended that twisted pair and/or shielded

wire be used. If shielded wire is used, the shield at the OMP-MODL

end should be connected to an external earth ground (Figure 3... -

30) or if available, a grounded Shield connection provided on

another type installed interface module (such as the MLIM-1).

Range

Excitation

Current

Range

Excitation

Current

Res 200 ohm

1 mA

Res 200,000 ohm

10 uA

Res 200 ohm

10 mA

1 mA

Res 400,000 ohm

10 uA

1 mA

Res 400 ohm

RTD-100 ohm 300C

RTD-100 ohm 850C

RTD-1000 ohm 300C

RTD-1000 ohm 850C

Therm -32 to 250C

Therm -4 to 250C

Res 400 ohm

10 mA

100 uA

10 uA

1 mA

Res 2000ohm

Res 4000 ohm

Res 10,000 ohm

Res 20,000 ohm

Res 40,000 ohm

Res 100,000 ohm

100 uA

10 uA

100 uA

Therm +10 to 250C

Therm +25 to 250C

10 uA

Excitation Currents used for MLIM-4 Ranges

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

NOTES:

3-46

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-8; DIGITAL I/O INTERFACE MODULE OVERVIEW

Overview:

The MLIM-8 is an eight channel Interface Module for use in the OMP-MODL

System Base. Each of the eight channels can be individually programmed

for any combination of Event input or Digital output via the HyperWare

software (HyperNet).

Module Installation:

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions of the Interface Module onto the System Base.

Module Address (Layer) Switch bank

OFF

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

ml051

Figure 3... -31: MLIM-8 Module Address Switch Bank

I/O Module Layer Requirements / Limitations:

The MLIM-8 module can be installed in any of the five I/O Module positions

(Figure 3... -4). The module layer address must be set on the module to

correspond to the layer position into which the module is installed.

This address is programmed into the module through the use of the Module

Address Switch bank (Figure 3... -31). The switch bank contains 5 switches.

Note the marking on the circuit board identifying address rows for Module

Layers 2 through 5. Set one switch in the bank ON corresponding to a

module layer determined above. The switch bank should have only ONE

switch ON and the other four switches OFF.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

CAUTION: The switch bank may have different numbering than the circuit

board... insure that the marking on the circuit board is followed... not the

marking on the switch banks.

Hardware Input Configuration Switches:

No hardware input configuration switches are provided on the MLIM-8. All

configuration is done via the HyperNet software (with the exception of the

Module Address setting discussed above).

Software Configuration of the MLIM-8:

The MLIM-8 module is completely configured on a channel by channel basis

from within the HyperNet software. This software configuration and

utilization of the various MLIM-8 channels in a Program Net is covered in

Chapter 7, within the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A, and within this

document.

MLIM-8; EVENT INPUT APPLICATION

The Event function of the MLIM-8 allows for the recording of the state of an ON/OFF

type input. Configured as an Event input, a channel will accept a powered input

signal (ranging from 0 to a maximum of 26VDC) or a contact closure (dry contact)

input.

Event icon

(MLIM-8)

For powered input signals, the MLIM-8 Event function defines

signals less than 1VDC as a Low level and greater than 4VDC

(26VDC max) as a High level.

For contact closure type inputs, power is automatically supplied

from the MLIM-8 channel circuitry via a 100Kohm pull-up

resistor (R1 in Figure 3... -32).

Channel input impedance is greater than 30K ohm.

A 40mS debounce circuit can be enabled via software which can be used to filter out

`contact bounce’ (Refer to the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A for details).

3-48

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

V+

Current Limited Output Driver

Event Signal

Debounce RC

Software Controlled

Debounce Circuit

COM

ML135

COM

Logger

Circuit Ground

Figure 3... -32: Simplified schematic of MLIM-8 input/output channel

(single channel shown)

Event Input Signal Connections:

To utilize an MLIM-8 channel as an Event input, connect the input signal

positive lead to an Input terminal (Chan A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H) and the

Contact Closure Application

Contact Closure

ML058

Isolation from Relay contact closure

Powered Signal Application

TTL or CMOS

15VDC Max

VDC

Lamp

Figure 3... -33: Contact closure and Powered type Event signal input

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

negative lead to one of the four Common terminals on the module terminal

strip (Figure 3... -33). Note that all of the four Common terminals on the

terminal strip (3, 6, 9, 12) are interconnected and connect directly to the

OMP-MODL circuit ground. Refer to Chapter 7 for steps to generate a

Terminal Strip Wiring printout for use in making field wiring connections.

CAUTION: Note that a direct connection exists between

the common (-) terminal on all eight channels of the

MLIM-8. When connecting to multiple event signal

sources sharing a common ground or reference, insure

that the source’s ground or reference is connected to the

terminal strip `common’ terminal to prevent shorting out

of the source signal and possible damage to the MLIM-8.

For most event applications, shielding is not necessary due to the relatively

low input impedance of the channel and the high noise immunity of the

MLIM-8 channel input.

MLIM-8; DIGITAL OUTPUT APPLICATION

An MLIM-8 channel configured as a Digital Output can provide an ON/OFF voltage

signal for alarming applications. The output is a current limited voltage signal with

the approximate voltage/current characteristics shown in Figure 3... -34. As shown,

with a light load, the output voltage maintains approximately 4+ VDC but as the

Digital

Output icon

(MLIM-8)

HL033

Current (milliAmps)

Figure 3... -34: MLIM-8 Digital output drive characteristics

current draw increases, current limiting occurs and the output voltage droops. The

output can be short circuited continuously without damage to the output drive

circuitry, but the OMP-MODL battery life will be correspondingly reduced.

3-50

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Digital Output Signal Connections:

To utilize an MLIM-8 channel as a Digital Output, connect the load positive

lead to an Output terminal (Chan A, B, C, D. E, F, G, or H) and the load

negative lead to one of the four Common terminals on the module terminal

strip (Figure 3... -35). Note that all of the four Common terminals are

interconnected and connect directly to the OMP-MODL circuit ground (see

Figure 3... -32). Refer to Chapter 7 for steps to generate a Terminal Strip

Wiring printout for use in making field wiring connections.

Terminal Strip

10 11 12

ML134

LOAD

Figure 3... -35: MLIM-8 terminal strip connections

(configured as outputs)

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

NOTES

3-52

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-5; PCMCIA MEMORY CARD MODULE

Overview:

The MLIM-5 is a special function Interface Module for use with the OMP-

MODL System Base. The MLIM-5 provides capability to record data to a

removable SRAM based memory card (Omega Engineering Part Numbers;

MC-50, MC-100, MC-200) rather than to internal OMP-MODL memory. The

data on the collected memory card can then be read viaa serial connection

to the logger (modem or RS-232) or removed and inserted/read with a PD-1,

PCMCIA Drive, installed (connected to) on a PC.

The MLIM-5 can also be provided with a 2400B (P/N: MLIM-5-2400) or

14.4Kbaud modem (P/N: MLIM-5-144). This section’s PCMCIA discussion is

pertinent to these modules and the modem aspects are detailed in following

sections.

Module Installation:

Installation of the MLIM-5 into the OMP-MODL System Base is unique in

that it requires a special set of signals only available from the connector on

the MLCPU-1 module. For this reason, the MLIM-5 can only be installed

between the MLCPU-1 module and the MLAD-1 module as shown in Figure

3... -4.

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions for installing the Module into the System Base.

Configuration of the MLIM-5:

The presence of a MLIM-5 is detected automatically by the OMP-MODL

upon power-up. No additional software or hardware configuration of the

module is necessary.

If the OMP-MODL is equipped with a ML-DISP display module, detection

and initialization of the MLIM-5 can be observed on the LCD at power-up. In

loggers so equipped, at power-up, a Modem Baud Rate Test... message will

display indicating that the logger has detected the presence of the MLIM-5

card and is testing it for modem presence. After a short wait, the display will

indicate No Modem Detected, 2400 Baud Modem Detected, or 14.4 Baud

Modem Detected as the case may be...then proceed to further initialization

steps.

Operation of the MLIM-5 and PCMCIA Memory Card:

For full details on the configuration and use of the PCMCIA card, refer to

Chapter 6.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

NOTE

Numerous types of PCMCIA cards are currently

available on the market utilizing various

technologies. To insure compatibility with the MLIM-

5, utilize only Omega Engineering supplied memory

cards or verify alternate parts compatibility with

Omega Engineering Technical Support prior to

plugging into the OMP-MODL.

3-54

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-5-2400; PCMCIA AND 2400B MODEM MODULE

Overview:

The MLIM-5-2400 module provides PCMCIA memory card support as

discussed in the MLIM-5 section and also provides 1200/2400 Baud

telephone modem communications capability. Installation of this module will

allow the full complement of serial communications/ control of the OMP-

MODL from a remotely located PC equipped with a modem. Additionally,

loggers equipped with a modem can utilize the Pager Alarm Output feature

from within HyperWare (see Appendix A).

The MLIM-5-2400 incorporates a low power modem, drawing approximately

50mA during operation (off-hook) and 0 mA while quiescent (on-hook).

PCMCIA SLOT

(MEMORY CARDS ONLY)

PHONE LINE CONNECTION

TO INTERNAL MODEM

ML019

Figure 3... -36: MLIM-5-2400 (or -144)

Module Installation:

Installation of the MLIM-5-2400 into the OMP-MODL System Base is unique

in that it requires a special set of signals only available from the connector

on the MLCPU-1 module. For this reason, the MLIM-5-2400 can only be

installed between the MLCPU-1 module and the MLAD-1 module as shown

in Figure 3... -4.

Refer to the Installation Section earlier in this chapter for detailed installation

instructions for installing the Module into the System Base.

Configuration of the MLIM-5-2400:

The presence of a MLIM-5 is detected automatically by the OMP-MODL

upon power-up. No additional software or hardware configuration of the

module is necessary.

Telephone Line Connection:

A standard voice grade telephone line can be used with the MLIM-5-2400.

The two phone conductors (tip and ring) can be connected to the MLIM-5-

2400 via the modular phone jack on the end of the module. Polarity is not

critical for either connection method.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

Plug a telephone cord equipped with a 6/2 modular phone plug (RJ-12 type)

into the modular phone socket accessible at the end of the module (Figure

3... -36). Insure that the phone conductors are installed into the center two

locations of the plug (polarity is not critical).

Various length phone extension cords with the RJ-12 type modular phone

plugs on each end are readily available from most phone supply stores.

Insure that the `telephone base’ type cord is used... not the `handset’ cord as

the handset plug is smaller and will not effect a good connection.

Plug the other end of the phone cord into the telephone wall jack.

Hardware Configuration Switches:

No hardware configuration switches are provided on the MLIM-5-2400. All

configuration is done via the HyperWare software.

Operation of the MLIM-5-2400:

The presence of the installed MLIM-5-2400 is detected automatically by the

OMP-MODL upon power-up. If the OMP-MODL is equipped with a ML-DISP

display module, detection and initialization of the MLIM-5-2400 can be

observed on the LCD.

In loggers so equipped, at power-up, a Modem Baud Rate Test... message

will display indicating that the logger has detected the presence of the MLIM-

5 card and is testing it for modem presence. After a short wait, the display

will indicate that a 2400 Baud modem has been detected.

The MLIM-5-2400 is self-configuring with the exception of one parameter...

the number of rings before the OMP-MODL answers an incoming call. This

parameter is set from within HyperNet (the Global icon) and is thoroughly

explained within the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A under the Global icon

section.

Additional information on the setup and configuration of the modem located

at the PC is provided in Appendix K.

3-56

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

MLIM-5-144; PCMCIA AND 14.4K BAUD MODEM MODULE

Overview:

The MLIM-5-144 module provides PCMCIA memory card support as

discussed in the MLIM-5 section and also provides 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,

and 14400 Baud telephone modem communications capability. Installation

of this module will allow the full complement of serial communications/

control of the OMP-MODL from a remotely located PC equipped with a

modem. Additionally, loggers equipped with a modem can utilize the Pager

Alarm Output feature from within HyperWare (see Appendix A).

The MM-14.4 is a low power modem, drawing approximately 125mA during

operation (off-hook) and 0 mA while quiescent (on-hook).

Installation / Operation:

The MM-14.4 is installed and configured identically to the MLIM-5-2400.

Refer to the MLIM-5-2400 installation and configuration instructions in the

previous section for details.

Additional information on the setup and configuration of the modem located

at the PC is provided in Appendix K.

USING THE OMP-MODL

3-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

NOTES:

3-58

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3... INTERFACE MODULES

USING THE MODULOGGER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-1

4... HYPERWARE™ SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION

SOFTWARE OVERVIEW

HyperWare™, a multi-functioned Windows™ based software package. HyperWare

is multi-function Windows based software application that works with the OMP-

MODL to provide communications, programming and collected data display.

Integrated in the HyperWare program are the following windows / environments:

HyperComm™ - supports serial communications between the

OMP-MODL, the PC, and the PCMCIA drive graphically. Via

HyperComm, Status inquiries can be made, data is downloaded,

and Program Nets are transferred between the PC, the PCMCIA

drive and/or the OMP-MODL,

HyperNet™ - a visual programming environment for

developing Program Nets via Icons and connections. The

developed Net is then transferred to the OMP-MODL memory

where it executes, providing operating instructions for the

logging session.

Post Processing (including HyperPlot™) - for graphing and

data conversion of OMP-MODL collected data.

HyperTrack™ - providing real-time data display of Program

Net nodes as they are processed by the OMP-MODL.

File Tools Options Help

HyperComm

Communications

File Tools Options Help

HyperNet

HyperTrack

Post-Processing

Program Net

Development

Real-Time

Graphic Data Display

with HyperPlot and

File Conversions

Data Display

ML131

Figure 4... -1: Organization of HyperWare software

Each of the above HyperWare windows is covered in a separate chapter within this

manual. In a typical data collection session with the OMP-MODL, all of the above

functions will be used.

USING THE MODULOGGER

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4... HYPERWARE™ SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION

PC REQUIREMENTS

To install and use HyperWare, the following minimum equipment is required:

386 or higher IBM PC compatible

4 Meg (minimum) of RAM memory

Mouse or other pointing device

Serial port for OMP-MODL connection (via Modem or RS-232

link)

Microsoft Windows 3.1x, 95 or NT

VGA display

3 Meg of Hard disk space

Windows supported / installed printer (optional)

HYPERWARE INSTALLATION

To install the HyperWare program onto your PC hard disk follow these steps:

1. Start Microsoft Windows.

2. Insert the HyperWare Program disk #1 into your floppy drive.

3. From the Program Manager's File menu, select Run, then type

a:install (or b:install) then <ENTER>

Windows 95 or NT users should select Run from the Start

button, then type a:install (or b:install) then <ENTER>

4. Follow the on screen directions for installing the software.

Dialogs prompting for User input will display during the

installation providing the opportunity to customize the

installation. For most Users, selecting the default responses to

the prompts will provide a fool-proof installation.

5. After installation, double-click on the new HyperWare icon (from

within the Program Manager) to launch the HyperWare

application.

UPGRADING HYPERWARE TO A NEW VERSION:

Instructions for upgrading HyperWare from a previous release are supplied with the

new upgrade diskette.

4-2

USING THE MODULOGGER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4... HYPERWARE™ SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION

HYPERWARE PROGRAM TOPOLOGY

Upon launch of the HyperWare program, the HyperComm window will be displayed

showing graphics of a PC, a HyperLogger, OMP-MODL, or OMP-MNL and a partial

serial cable connecting between the two. Upon establishing a serial connection

between the logger and the PC, the cable will be show connection and the logger

graphic will change to reflect the model logger to which the PC is connected. Details

of establishing this connection are in the following chapter.

From the HyperComm window, switching to other windows (HyperNet, HyperTrack,

and Post-Processing) is performed by clicking on the buttons displayed on the button

bar at the top of the HyperComm window. HyperWare can be visualized as shown

in Figure 4... -1. From the other windows, return to the HyperComm window by

clicking on the HyperComm button at the left end of the button-bar.

Figure 4... -2: The Opening HyperComm Window (serial connection established)

USER INTERFACE

HyperWare complies with the conventional keyboard and mouse commands that

are used in most Windows applications. Some commands require double-clicking

(such as the Enable and Stop commands via serial communications) and others

USING THE MODULOGGER

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4... HYPERWARE™ SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION

utilize a visual click and drag of icons (as in construction of Program Nets and for

icon based serial communications).

In the HyperComm window and throughout HyperWare, passing the cursor over

icons and buttons results in a short descriptor display on the Status Message Bar in

the lower left corner of the screen.

HyperWare features on-line help using the conventional Windows help format.

Press the <F1> key at any time or uitilize the Help menu to select options for

HyperWare help.

4-4

USING THE MODULOGGER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

5... HYPERCOMM™ SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

OVERVIEW

Upon launching HyperWare, the HYPERCOMM window (Figure 5... -1) will appear with

graphic images of a PC with a connected PCMCIA card drive (optional) and a

logger. From within this window, communications between the PC and the logger as

well as communications between the PC and the PCMCIA card drive are initiated

and handled.

Figure 5... -1: HyperComm serial communications window (no serial connection)

In serial communication between the logger and the PC, both RS-232 and

telephone modem communications are supported. A simple dialog box is provided

for the communication link setup, thereafter all communications are handled by

dragging icons (representing information) between the graphic PC and logger.

The external PCMCIA card drive is an optional system item. Data and Program Net

information is transferred between the PC and the PCMCIA card drive by simply

dragging and dropping the appropriate icons overlaying the PC and the drive.

Chapter 6 contains details on the setup and use of the PCMCIA card feature.

Communications between the PC and a connected logger are required for a

multitude of functions including download of logger collected data, programming of

the logger, and real-time data display.

From the HyperComm window, access to the HYPERNET, HYPERTRACK, and POST-

PROCESSING windows is achieved by clicking on one of the three buttons on the

Button Toolbar.

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

ESTABLISHING AN RS-232 LINK

RS-232 Hardware Connection:

A DB-9 to RJ-12 modular plug adapter (P/N: RJDB-9H) or DB-25 to RJ-12

adapter (P/N: RJDB-25H) and modular plug type cable is required to connect

between the logger and the PC serial port. Plug the appropriate (9 pin or 25

pin) RJDB adapter into the PC serial port to be used for communication.

Plug one end of the RS-232 cable (CAR-4) into the adapter modular jack

and the other into the Serial Port jack located on the end of the MLCPU-1

module and turn logger System Power ON.

HyperComm Connection via RS-232:

After launching HyperWare and display of the opening screen, the

HYPERCOMM window will be displayed. Move the cursor over the graphic

DB-25 type connector (center of the screen on the cable) and double-click to

bring up the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS dialog box (Figure 5... -2).

Figure 5... -2: Serial Communications setup dialog box (RS-232 mode)

For RS-232 communication, insure that the USE MODEM check box in the

MODEM CONTROL section is not checked.

Select the PORT using the pull-down list boxes under the PORT PARAMETER

SECTION. Select the port on your PC to which the RS-232 adapter is

connected. For RS-232 communications 19,200 Baud is automatically

selected and will provide the fastest data transfers..

5-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

TIP: If the port number is unkown, select one of the

ports then attempt to connect (see following). If

unsuccessful, change the selected Port and try again.

After selecting the port, click on the CONNECT button to initiate

communication with the logger. At this time, HyperWare will attempt to

communicate with the logger . During establishment of the connection, the

OK button will gray and when successful, it will return. Close the SERIAL

COMMUNICATIONS dialog box by clicking the OK button and HyperWare will

return to the HYPERCOMM window ready for communication.

If the link fails ( a dialog will display indicating failure) , check the following:

Is the cable connected?

Is the Omega Engineering supplied adapter used?

Insure that the adapter used is the one that was supplied

with the logger. (other Omega Engineering products use

other similar looking but funtionally different adapters)

NOTE: LBI supplied adapters are wired for proper

compatibility between the logger and the PC. If an

alternatively sourced adapter is used, insure that it

complies with the wiring specified in Appendix I.

Also, adapters that convert DB-25 to DB-9 (and vis-a-

versa) commonly cause problems. Utilize the proper

adapter supplied with the logger (both DB-9 and DB-25

are supplied).

Is the logger power ON?

Select another PC serial port from within the SERIAL

COMMUNICATIONS dialog box and retry.

ESTABLISHING A TELEPHONE MODEM LINK

Modem Hardware Configuration:

Before attempting a link to a logger via telephone modem, insure the

following equipment requirements are met:

The logger must have an MLIM-5-2400 or MLIM-5-144 module installed.

This modem is referred to as the remote modem in this manual.

The PC must have a Hayes compatible modem installed or connected

and powered. This modem is referred to as the local modem in this

manual.

Info on the PC modem capabilities must be on hand (ie Baud rate

capabilities, installed port, etc)

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

HyperComm Connection via Modem:

Launch HyperWare and after the opening screen, the HYPERCOMM window

will be displayed. Move the cursor over the graphic DB-25 type connector

(center of the screen on the cable) and double-click to bring up the SERIAL

COMMUNICATIONS dialog box (Figure 5... -2).

Click on the USE MODEM check box under MODEM CONTROL and the dialog

will change slightly (Figure 5... -3) to enable editing of parameters in the

MODEM CONTROL section. Edit the various parameters within the MODEM

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS dialog box per the following guidelines:

Port:

Specify the PORT using the pull-down list box under the PORT

PARAMETER SECTION. Select the port to which the modem is

connected.

TIP: If the port number to which the modem is

connected is unkown, select one of the ports then

attempt to connect (see following). If unsuccessful,

change the selected Port and try again.

5-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Figure 5... -3: Serial Communications setup dialog box (Modem mode)

Baud:

Specify the baud rate rate that will be used to communicate between

the PC and the local modem. Set this baud rate per the following

table:

Local Modem Capability

1200 baud

Set Dialog Box Baud To:

1200 baud

2400 baud

9600 or faster baud

19,200 baud

Table 5... -1: Local modem settings

FYI: The remote modem (at the logger) will automatically

adapt to the baud rate of the calling modem.

Redial:

If this box is checked, HyperWare will automatically make another

attempt to call the logger if the first attempt fails for any reason.

The time specified in the edit box is a delay time to wait before

attempting the next call.

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Phone:

A short dialing directory of frequently called logger numbers can be

maintained using the List Box provided.

ADDING A NEW DIRECTORY ENTRY:

To add a directory entry, use conventional text editing

commands to highlite then type over an existing entry. The entry

will not be lost and a new entry will be added.

The format for the directory entry consists of text followed by a

colon, then the phone number.

USER TEXT:619-555-1212

The phone number may contain numbers, hyphens, parenthesis

and commas with the following action:

Numbers - digits 0 through 9 are dialed

Hyphens and parenthesis - ignored during dialing

Commas - insert a two second delay during dialing.

Delays may be required for accessing an outside line on

some phone systems.

EDITING AN EXISTING DIRECTORY ENTRY

Select the entry to be edited via the drop down list box. Using

the mouse, highlite the text to be edited and type in corrections.

REMOVING DIRECTORY ENTRIES

The phone list is maintained within the hyperlog.ini file. This file

is located in the Windows directory and can be edited with any

text editor. Before editing this file, close the HyperWare

application and make a backup copy of the hyperlog.ini file in

case it needs to be restored. Two lines in the hyperlog.ini file

need to be deleted to properly remove a phone directory entry.

Follow these steps to remove the directory entry:

1. Close the HyperWare application.

2. Locate the hyperlog.ini file in the windows directory and

make a copy of it (eg hyperlog.bak)

3. Using Notepad, open hyperlog.ini

4. Locate the section titled [Modems]

5. Locate the line starting with PhoneX= where X is a

number and the entry to the right of the equal sign is the

entry to be removed.

6. Make a note of the value of X. Then delete the entire

line starting with PhoneX =

7. Locate and delete a second line with the same value of

X that starts with ModemX= which will be located in the

same section.

8. Save and Exit the editor. Re-launch HyperWare and

check that all is well.

Modem:

HyperComm includes the standard configurations for three major

modem brands, Hayes Compatible, US Robotics, and Zoom. Refer

5-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

to the modem’s manual for the command set used by the modem

installed at the PC. Note that most modems (although not

necessarily manufactured by Hayes, US Robotics, or Zoom) can

utilize one of these three configurations.

Clicking on the Modem list box and selecting the desired modem will

automatically configure the various modem parameters to meet

most User’s needs.

If a modem with a command set different from the supplied three is

used, a custom Modem Type entry can be added to the Modem list

box. To enter a custom Modem Type, the Dial Prefix, Hangup

command, and Initialization strings need to be added. Refer to the

User’s manual supplied with your modem and follow these steps to

add a custom Modem Type entry:

1. Click on the Modem list box arrow and enter a new

Modem configuration name.

2. Edit the Dial Prefix text box with the command required

by your modem. Upon commencing of dialing, this

Prefix string is sent immediately before the phone

number. For most modems this will be ATDT (if touch-

tone dialing is supported by the phone line) or ATDP (for

pulse dialing on phone lines not supporting touch-tones)

3. Edit the Hangup text box for the requirements of your

modem. Nearly all modems will use ATH. The Hangup

string is transmitted to the modem when the User clicks

on the Hangup button from within the Modem

Communications dialog.

4. Edit the Initialization text box for your modem’s

requirements. A multitude of variations are possible for

this initialization string and the modem User’s manual

should be referenced carefully. The initialization string is

sent to the modem immediately after clicking on the Dial

button within the Modem Communication dialog. Key

parameters to specify in the modem initialization string

include:

Verbal Response codes ENABLED

Full Response code set ENABLED (eg Busy,

Connect 14400/ARQ, etc)

Echo DISABLED (off)

5. Clicking on the OK button saves the three strings to the

Modem Type name specified in the Modem list box.

After configuring all modem parameters, click on DIAL and the modem

connection sequence will commence. After a short dialing and

communication protocol negotiation between the modems, a dialog box will

show indicating success or failure in making the link.

If successful, click OK . Close the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS dialog box with

another OK and HyperWare will return to the HYPERCOMM window ready for

communication.

If the link fails, check the following points:

Is the PC to modem cable connected? (external

modems only)

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Is the modem power ON? (external modems only)

Is the local modem port selected correctly? If in doubt,

select another serial port from within the SERIAL

COMMUNICATIONS dialog box and retry.

Is the selected baud rate correct for the modem?

Is a working telephone line connected to the modem?

Is there another device using the telephone line (i.e. a

fax machine)

Does the modem work with other communication

programs? If not, this may indicate that the modem port

is conflicting with another serial port.

Additional modem configuration and troubleshooting information is supplied

within Appendix K.

VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS VIA HYPERCOMM™

Once the serial link (via RS-232 or modem) is established, a complete cable will

show between the logger and the PC and additional icons will overlay the logger

graphic (Figure 5... -4). Depending on the type of link established, a modem or DB-

25 connector will display in the middle of the cable. At this time, control and

interrogation commands can be sent to the logger.

HyperWare automatically recognizes and adapts to the model of logger to which it

5-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Figure 5... -4: HyperComm serial communication window (connection established)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

connects (eg HyperLogger, OMP-MODL, OMP-MNL). The logger graphic on the left

side of the HyperComm Window portrays the model detected.

Communication Techniques

Visual communication has been designed into the HyperComm Window

allowing for intuitive mouse driven communication. Two methods are used

for communicating commands between the PC and the logger:

Drag and Drop of Icons: Icons representing various types of

information are overlayed on the PC and logger graphics. By

dragging and dropping these icons between the PC and the logger,

data communication is implemented.

For example, to set the logger Clock to the current PC time, merely

click and hold on the Clock Icon overlaying the PC, drag it over the

the logger and release it. A confirmation dialog will display to insure

your actions.

Double-Clicking Icons: Immediate commands can be executed by

double-clicking on many of the icons. For example, to Enable the

logger, position the cursor over the Enable Button and double-click

and a confirmation dialog will display to insure your actions.

TIP: Some of the icons can be double-clicked on as a

short-cut command. For example, double-clicking on the

Clock Icon overlaying the logger allows for directly setting

the clock via text entry.

Communication Icons and their Functions

Enable Button Icon

Double-clicking on this button performs the same function as

pressing the Enable button on the front of the logger. After double-

clicking, a dialog will appear to confirm the action. If any error

conditions exist (eg the Program Net is incompatible with the

hardware) a warning dialog will display and the logger may not be

Enabled. Operational Status can always be confirmed with the

Status Query command (below).

If the logger is Rotary Memory mode, and data has been stored to

memory, the memory will have to be cleared before Enabling is

allowed.

Stop Button Icon

Double-clicking on this button performs the same function as

pressing the Stop button on the front of the logger. After double-

clicking, a dialog will appear to confirm the action. Operational

Status can always be confirmed with the Status Query command

(below).

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Clear Button Icon (logger Clear not PCMCIA Clear)

When the logger is not Enabled, double-clicking on this button

results in a clearing of memory (after confirmation). After double-

clicking, a dialog will appear to confirm the action. Memory Status

can always be confirmed with the Status Query command (below).

The logger memory can be cleared while the logger is Enabled.

However, If the logger is Enabled, only memory containing data that

has been downloaded will be cleared. This allows for logger use in

long duration continuous acquistion and download periods without

missed data.

Unit Name and ID Query

Each logger can be assigned an ID and short Name. The ID and

NAME are retained in logger memory until changed via the

following procedure and are not cleared with power down or Memory

Clear commands. On loggers equipped with ML-DISP module both

entries can be displayed on the LCD under the STATUS menu and

are also available via a logger Status Query from the PC

(following).

To program the logger ID and NAME, move the cursor over the LCD

icon on the logger and double-click. A dialog will open for editing.

OK will reprogram the logger to the new ID and NAME.

Status Query

At any time, the logger can be interrogated for its operational Status.

Drag and drop the Status Icon from the logger to the PC and release

it. The Logger Status dialog (Figure 5... -6) will open detailing

operational information.

Figure 5...

-5: Status

icon

5-10

USING THE OMP-MODL

Figure 5... -6: Logger Status report dialog

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Reported information includes:

UNIT INFORMATION:

LOGGER VERSION:

Specifies the logger version number.

UNIT NAME AND UNIT ID:

User programmable information for tracking of equipment

(see procedure for setting described above).

UNIT TIME:

The current date and time on the logger internal real time

clock.

PROGRAM NET INFORMATION:

NAME AND DESCRIPTION:

Information that has been User programmed in the Global

Icon from within HyperNet.

CURRENT OPERATIONAL STATE:

OPERATIONAL MODE:

Indicates if the unit is Enabled, Stopped, Idle, etc.

REMAINING MEMORY:

Specifies the percentage and Kilobytes of data memory still

available. When using this number for estimating available

logging time consideration must be made for varying

sampling rates and data storage formats.

# OF SAMPLES LOGGED:

Specifies the number of samples recorded to memory.

SYSTEM SUPPLY VOLTAGE

Displays the logger supply voltage. If internal batteries are

installed in the logger and an external power supply is also

connected, the displayed Supply Voltage refers to the

greater of the two.

FYI: The displayed Supply Voltage is

measured at an internal node on the power

supply circuitry. Displayed battery voltage is

the voltage of the internal batteries .

External supply voltage will be

approximately 2 volts higher than indicated.

If the Input Range Jumper (see MLCPU-1

section of Chapter 2) is set to HI, the

External supply voltage will be

approximately 3.5 volts higher than

indicated.

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

BACKUP LITHIUM CELL:

The state of charge display for the lithium cell (used for data

memory and clock backup) will display GOOD or LOW. If

LOW is displayed, download any desired data memory, then

replace the lithium cell (See Appendix D).

INSTALLED H/W (HARDWARE)

This box lists the standard (eg relays, GPDI, etc) and installed

hardware (eg Interface Modules, modems, etc.)

ACTIVE MESSAGES

Displays any messages that have been generated due to

abnormal operating conditions (such as a power failure) or as a

result of a Message Icon being activated from within a Program

Net (Chapter 7).

Time Set

The logger real-time-clock can be set in two different ways.

Synchronized with PC Time: By dragging the Clock Icon from

the PC to the logger and releasing, the PC system time is

programmed into the logger.

Figure 5...

-7: Time

Set icon

Set Absolute Time: Double-clicking on the Clock Icon

overlaying the logger graphic will display a Time Set dialog. Edit

the dialog and select OK to program the logger clock to the

displayed date and time. This method is handy when

communicating via modem with loggers located in different time

zones.

Program Net Transfer

After the serial link is established, a Net icon will display overlaying

both the logger and the PC in the HyperComm window. The

Program Net icon overlaying the logger represents the Program Net

currently loaded into logger memory. The Program Net overlaying

the PC represents the last Program Net edited from within the

HyperNet (Chapter 7) development window or the last Program Net

downloaded from a serially connected logger.

Figure 5...

-8: Net

icon

Program Nets can be transferred in both directions:

Downloaded from the logger to the PC to review/edit the

Program Net currently loaded into logger memory.

Uploaded from the PC to the logger to reprogram the

logger

At any time, the Program Net currently loaded in the logger memory

can be downloaded to the PC. Click and drag the Program Net Icon

overlaying the logger to the PC and release it. This Program Net

can then be edited, saved, and/or uploaded back to the logger.

To reprogram the logger with a new Program Net, click and drag the

Net Icon overlaying the PC to the logger and release it. The Net

icon on the PC represents the last Program Net (*.NET) file edited

from within the HyperNet (Chapter 7) window or the last Program

Net downloaded from a serially connected logger.

5-12

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

If a different Program Net is to be transferred, open the desired

Program Net from within HyperNet, then return to the HyperComm

window and drag the icon to the logger.

Refer to Chapter 6 for details on the transfer of Program Net to and

from the PCMCIA card.

NOTE: If the target logger memory contains collected

data, the User will be prompted to download or clear the

data prior to reprogramming. Upon upload of the new

Program Net, data in the logger memory will be lost.

NOTE: During the upload of a Program Net to the

logger, several integrity tests are performed. One of the

tests checks the size of the Program Net to insure that it

will fit into the available logger memory. In the event that

the Program Net is too large, reduce the number of icons

and retry. Refer to the README file supplied with the

HyperWare for an approximate maximum number of

icons that can be included in a Program Net for that

version of software.

Data Download

To transfer data from the logger memory to a file on the PC disk,

click and drag the Memory icon overlaying the logger to the PC and

release it. After a prompt dialog, the data will be downloaded. Upon

completion of the serial data transfer, a filename will be requested

by a pop-up dialog.

Figure 5...

-9:

Memory

icon

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Figure 5... -10: File Information comments entry dialog

After entry of the filename, a dialog will display for the User to enter

additional File Information to be stored with the file (Figure 5... -10).

This information includes a short single line Title as well as room for

extensive comments. The File Information can be accessed at a

later time from within the Post-Processing window and HyperPlot.

Upon closing of this dialog, the Download file will then be processed

and stored to disk as an ascii file with the extension *.HLD.

Data downloads can be performed while the logger is Enabled and

executing a Program Net that uses either of the Log to Full modes

(see the Global Icon in Appendix A). If the logger is in the Rotary

Memory mode, the unit must be Stopped before data can be

downloaded.

Refer to Chapter 7 for details on the Download of Data from the

PCMCIA card.

Probe Point Query

During the construction of a Program Net within HyperNet™, the

User can opt to connect Probe Point icons to various nodes

throughout the net. These Probe Point icons allow the User to view

the current values on the nodes to which they are connected. One

of the ways that the Probe Point values can be viewed is by clicking

and dragging the Probe Point icon overlaying the logger to the PC

and releasing it. The last updated value at the Probe Point node is

then displayed on the PC. Optionally, by clicking on the Resample

Periodically check box, readings will be communicated to the display

dialog as the node is updated.

Figure 5...

-11: Probe

Point icon

5-14

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

FYI: Probe Point is used for the icon name as

connecting these icons to a node on a Net is somewhat

analogous to putting a test meter probe on the Net nodes

and reading a value.

If a Program Net that contains Probe Point icons is currently loaded

into PC memory, then a Probe Point icon will display overlaying the

PC.

Password

The logger contains a multi-level password system that can be used

to foil unauthorized access via telephone modem or RS-232

connection. The logger password system allows for five passwords,

a Master and four User passwords.

MASTER PASSWORD

Figure 5... -

12:

Password

lock

The Master password allows access to all logger functions,

including the ability to manage the User passwords. To enable or

change the Master password, double-click on the Password icon

(small lock graphic) in the upper left corner of the logger graphic

in the HyperComm Window . A dialog will appear which allows

the Master password to be changed, and the User passwords to

be configured.

USER PASSWORDS

Up to four User passwords can be set. These passwords allow for

specific control of access to individual logger functions. Access

to the User password configuration dialog requires the Master

password. To configure User passwords, double-click on the

Password icon, enter the Master password, and click on the

Configure button. A dialog will open allowing the User passwords

to be configured. Enter user passwords in the four text boxes at

the top of the dialog. Specific logger functions can then be

checked to allow access to that function for that password.

CAUTION

Keep track of Passwords as they can not be disabled

via a serial link without knowing the Master

password.

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

PASSWORD PROTECTED FUNCTIONS

Access to the following functions can be granted/denied via

the User password configuration dialog. A checked box

indicates that access is granted to the corresponding

function.

Download Net Program

Download Data

Upload Net Program

Figure 5... -13: Password Configuration Dialog

Enable

Stop

Clear Memory

Get Status

Set Time

Monitor Probes

Real Time Tracking

Set Unit Name/ID

DOWNLOAD NET - A SPECIAL CASE

In order to Download Data or run a Real Time Tracking session,

the Program Net that is running in the logger must also be loaded

into HyperWare. Because of this, HyperWare automatically

5-16

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

Downloads the Net from the logger prior to executing either

function. Since this is required, any time that either the Download

Data or Real Time Tracking boxes are checked, the Download

Net box is automatically checked.

DISABLING PASSWORDS

To disable the logger Password feature, the Master Password is

required. Double-click on the Password (lock) icon, enter the

Master password when prompted and select Change Master

Password. Click the OK button without entering any text in the

New Password or Confirm text boxes. This will clear the Master

password and allow access to all logger functions without a

password.

USING THE OMP-MODL

5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

NOTES:

5-18

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5... HYPERCOMM™ COMMUNICATIONS

USING THE MODULOGGER™

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-1

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

OVERVIEW:

The OMP-MODL utilizes the optional PCMCIA Card System to provide expanded

data storage capacity within the OMP-MODL and/or to provide storage to a

removable memory card that can be removed and transported to another location

where the data is read from the card and saved into a file on the a PC.

For expanded memory capability, the OMP-MODL requires the MLIM-5 Interface

Module (which includes the PCMCIA card socket) and one or more PCMCIA

memory cards. If the memory card is to be used in a transportable mode, an

external PCMCIA drive (PD-1 or also referred to as TMD-650) is required at the PC

location.

With PCMCIA memory card system the following features are available:

Expanded memory... OMP-MODL memory storage increase

from the standard 15,000 (80,000 optional) readings to in excess

of 250,000 readings.

Transportable data... the memory card can be removed from the

OMP-MODL and transported to a PC location where the data

can be read from the card

Field reprogramming of the OMP-MODL... a Program Net can

be built in the office through HyperWare and uploaded to the

PCMCIA card. The card can then be taken to the logger site

and plugged into the unit to reprogram it in the field.

PCMCIA CARD SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

The PCMCIA card system consists of the following components:

MLIM-5 Interface Module: the MLIM-5 interface module

installs into the OMP-MODL System Base and contains the

socket into which the memory card inserts. MLIM-5-2400 and

MLIM-5-144 also include this function.

NOTE

This memory card socket is not PCMCIA spec

compliant. For this reason, do not plug any products into

this socket that have not been provided or approved by

Omega Engineering Incorporated.

Memory Card: with varying capacity from 50,000 samples to in

excess of 250,000 samples, this is the transportable SRAM

memory onto which data and Program Nets are stored.

PD-1 (also referred to as the TMD-650) PCMCIA Drive: this

external drive connects to the PC parallel (printer) port and

provides read/write capability between the PC (running

HyperWare software) and the PCMCIA card.

PD-1 Software Drivers: a set of software drivers (CardTalk)

provided with the PD-1 that are installed to hard disk and

USING THE OMP-MODL

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

provide the necessary software interface between the PD-1drive

and HyperWare. Also included are a number of utilities for use

in formatting, copying etc on the PCMCIA card.

PCMCIA CARD - EXPANDED MEMORY CAPACITY APPLICATION

Hardware Configuration

For applications using the PCMCIA card only for expanded memory capacity

within the OMP-MODL, the only components required are the MLIM-5 and

one or more memory cards (formatted for us with the OMP-MODL PCMCIA

card system). The MLIM-5 module should be installed per the Interface

Module instructions in Chapter 3. Memory cards for use in this system are

supplied pre-formatted from Omega Engineering Incorporated.

Software Configuration

No special software configuration is required. When the MLIM-5 is installed

in the OMP-MODL, the OMP-MODL will auto-detect the presence of the

module.

Operation of the MLIM-5 and PCMCIA Memory Card:

To use the PCMCIA card for data storage...

1. STOP the OMP-MODL. Cycle the OMP-MODL power to

OFF.

2. Visually inspect the formatted and prepared (as supplied

from Omega Engineering Incorporated ) PCMCIA card

connector for any debris in any of the connector holes

and clean if necessary.

The Write Protect switch located on the end of the card

opposite the connector should be slid away from the WP

position to enable writing of data to the memory card

(Refer to Figure 6... -1).

3. Orient the card with the top label facing the top of the

OMP-MODL and slide the card fully into the card slot in

Option Port 2. Upon full insertion, the Eject button next

to the slot will be fully extended.

4. Turn the OMP-MODL Power ON. Press the ENABLE

button.

5. The PCMCIA card will be automatically detected and

the LCD will display ENABLED - PCMCIA. All logged

data will be stored in the PCMCIA card.

If the OMP-MODL displays STOPPED after Enabling,

the Write Protect switch on the PCMCIA card is in the

PROTECT position. Correct and reinsert the card.

Press ENABLE and observe the display.

If the PCMCIA card does not contain the proper format

and support files (as supplied from Omega Engineering

Incorporated) a message on the display will indicate

CARD ERROR. The card must be reformatted and the

support files rewritten before use. Refer to the PCMCIA

Miscellaneous Section (near end of this chapter) for

details on reformatting cards.

6-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

CAUTION:

If the memory card does not easily insert fully into

the socket, double-check the orientation. The socket

is designed to prevent full insertion with reversed

orientation.

For data storage on the memory card, the Write

Protect switch must be in the disabled position (ie

slid away from the WP mark)

NOTE

Numerous types of PCMCIA cards are currently

available on the market utilizing various

technologies. To insure compatibility with the MLIM-

5, utilize only Omega Engineering supplied memory

cards or verify alternate parts compatibility with

Omega Engineering Technical Support prior to

plugging into the OMP-MODL.

PCMCIA CARD - TRANSPORTABLE DATA APPLICATION

For applications of the PCMCIA card for transportable data, the OMP-MODL must

be configured with the MLIM-5 Interface Module and an the external PCMCIA drive

(PD-1) must be connected to the PC and interface drivers installed on the PC. The

correct PCMCIA drive letter must then be specified within HyperWare.

OMP-MODL Configuration

The MLIM-5 module should be installed per the Interface Module instructions

in Chapter 3. Memory cards for use in this system are supplied pre-

formatted from Omega Engineering Incorporated.

PC / External PCMCIA Drive Configuration

The following steps must be performed to configure the PC and the PD-1

external PCMCIA card drive. The procedure for connecting the PD-1 (also

known as TMD-650) drive and configuring the software drivers is contained

within the User’s Guide supplied with the PD-1 drive. Additional comments

and suggestions are provided below.

Connecting the PD-1 Drive:

Follow the instruction detailed in the User’s Guide supplied with the

drive.

USING THE OMP-MODL

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

Installing the CardTalk Drivers:

Follow the detailed instructions in the User’s Guide supplied with the

drive. The installation process creates a directory called CardTalk

and copies a number of files into it. It then modifies the

AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. A few additional

comments on this installation process:

Insure that the installation is done from DOS as

specified

Either the Express or the Custom Installation can be

used.

For use with HyperWare, only the SRAM card drivers

are required. (ie at the prompt, do not select to install

the FFS2 drivers for Microsoft Flash File system as

they are not required)

Two different types of parallel port are available on PC’s

today, the EPP (enhanced parallel port) and Standard.

All installations will run with the Standard port type

selected. If a EPP port is available, selecting this type

will provide slightly faster data read/write performance.

During the installation, if EPP is selected but is not

detected, a message will display and the CardTalk

software will not be installed. If this occurs, repeat the

installation choosing Standard.

Specify the correct printer port to use during installation

(the default is LPT1)

Near the end of the installation process, changes will be made to the

PC AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. Three lines are

added to the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICEHIGH=C:\CARDTALK\SSPPORT.SYS /lpt:1

DEVICEHIGH=C:\CARDTALK\CTALKCS.EXE

DEVICEHIGH=C:\CARDTALK\CARDTALK.SYS /A /MEMW

/IOW

In the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, the CARDTALK directory is added to

the PATH.

TIP: These drivers are fairly large and will be loaded into

memory at reboot. For Users running DOS 6.0 or later

with the Multiple Configuration boot options, it may be

desirable to set up an optional load of these drivers.

Refer to the DOS Help and/or manual for details on how

to set up the Multiple Configuration boot.

6-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

TIP: Upon boot of the PC with the standard drivers

installed, the PD-1 will be assigned the next consecutive

drive letter. For User’s requiring specific assignment of a

drive letter to the PD-1 drive, the CONFIG.SYS file can

be modified to force the PD-1 drive to be assigned to a

particular drive letter. Refer to the Technical Support

FAQ (frequently asked questions) sheet supplied with the

drive for details.

TIP: For user’s that do not require control of the specific

drive letter assigned to the PD-1 and want to minimize

the size of the loaded PD-1 interface drivers, an older

version of the CardTalk drivers (V2.16 for the TMD-550)

is available. This version requires only 24K of memory

and will support only the SRAM cards used in the OMP-

MODL system. Additionally, this version of drivers does

not allow for a User assigned drive letter... it will

automatically use the next drive letter in the system.

If used, these drivers install into a directory called

DATABOOK instead of the directory called CARDTALK

referred to within this chapter.

NOTE:

The OMP-MODL and HyperWare PCMCIA card

system has been designed to be implemented using

the external PD-1 PCMCIA drive. Users with PC’s

equipped with integral PCMCIA drives may be able to

utilize drivers supplied with their PC’s for read/write

from DOS formatted SRAM PCMCIA cards. However

due to the variability in PCMCIA card spec

compliance and system configurations,

considerable cautious experimentation may be

required to implement the system.

Quick Test of the PCMCIA Drive Configuration

After installation of the drivers, reboot the PC and the drivers will be

loaded into memory. The drive letter that the PCMCIA drive is

installed as will be displayed briefly in the on-screen messages

displayed during the system boot. Note this letter for future use.

If the system does not correctly identify the drive, error messages

will display. Refer to the PCMCIA drive User’s Guide for instructions

on troubleshooting drive configuration problems.

After a successful configuration, the drive installation can be simply

tested as follows:

USING THE OMP-MODL

6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

CAUTION

Before inserting a PCMCIA card into the drive, touch

the case of the PC or some other ground to

discharge any static body charge. This step

minimizes the chance of damaging the card by

discharging your body static charge through the

PCMCIA card connector.

1. Insert a formatted and prepared (as supplied by Omega

Engineering Incorporated) PCMCIA card into the drive.

Be sure that a card is inserted fully into the drive before

testing.

2. Use the conventional DOS command DIR X: where X

represents the drive letter assigned to the PCMCIA drive

to read the files on the card.

Three files should be listed on the card:

FORMAT.MEM

NET.MEM

DATA.MEM

HyperWare Software Configuration

After the PD-1 drive has been connected, the drivers installed, an installed

drive letter determined, and access to the drive has been tested through

DOS, HyperWare must be configured.

Launch the HyperWare program under Windows and select the

Options/Paths menu from the HyperComm Window Menu Bar.

1. In the PCMCIA Format Command Text Box specify the

drive and path where the CardTalk drivers are located

followed by the command TCFORMAT.

In most installations, this will be

C:\CARDTALK\TCFORMAT.EXE.

The command TCFORMAT is a special command

supplied with the CardTalk drivers that is used for

formatting PCMCIA cards in the PD-1 drive. The

resulting card format is DOS compatible.

2. In the PCMCIA drive Text Box, specify the drive letter

that is used to access the PCMCIA drive. (This letter was

determined and tested earlier in checking installation of

the drive with the DIR command.)

3. Select OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

4. Double-click on the PC drive graphic and HyperWare

will scan the PCMCIA card installed in the drive checking

for proper format and the presence of the three support

files.

6-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

PCMCIA Card Usage with HyperWare

The PCMCIA card, in a transportable memory application is typically used to

transfer collected data from a remotely located OMP-MODL to the PC

and/or to transfer a new Program Net from the PC to a remotely located

OMP-MODL.

Transferring Data from the OMP-MODL to the PC

After data has been stored on a PCMCIA card in the OMP-MODL,

the card can be transported back to the PC location where the

collected data is transferred from the card to a Download File on the

PC. The following steps detail this procedure:

1. Press STOP on the OMP-MODL front panel and cycle

the OMP-MODL power OFF. Remove the PCMCIA

card with the Eject button.

2. At this time, a new formatted and prepared card can be

inserted into the PCMCIA card socket and the OMP-

MODL can be powered up and the ENABLE button

pressed.

Observe the LCD for any error messages before leaving

the site.

NOTE: review the tips and cautionary measures to be

used in handling and insertion of the PCMCIA card in

the section above titled PCMCIA Card - Expanded

Memory Application

3. Transport the PCMCIA card to the PC location and

insert the card into the PCMCIA drive.

4. Double-click on the PCMCIA drive graphic within the

HyperComm Window and the PCMCIA card will

automatically be scanned. After a short delay, a

Program Net and Data icon will be displayed overlaying

the PCMCIA drive graphic.

5. Drag the Data icon from the PCMCIA drive to the PC

and the data transfer will commence. Refer to Chapter

6 for details on entering comments, etc during the data

transfer process.

6. The PCMCIA card can be cleared by double-clicking on

the CLEAR button located by the PD-1 graphic.

Transferring a Program Net from the PC to the OMP-

MODL

A OMP-MODL at a remote location can be reprogrammed by writing

a Program Net on a PCMCIA card at the PC location, then plugging

the PCMCIA card into the OMP-MODL. The following steps detail

this procedure:

1. Develop the new Program Net at the PC location (see

Chapter 7 on HyperNet Programming for details).

NOTE: it is imperative that the developed Program Net

is compatible with the remotely located OMP-MODL.

Great inconvenience can result if an incompatible

Program Net is developed , transported to the OMP-

USING THE OMP-MODL

6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

MODL, and attempted to be run. Methods to insure this

are discussed in Chapter 7.

2. Insert a PCMCIA card into the PD-1 drive

3. Drag the Program Net icon from the PC to the PD-1

graphic. A dialog will display stating that any data

currently on the PCMCIA card will be erased. Select OK

and the program is transferred.

4. Transport the card to the OMP-MODL location. Stop the

OMP-MODL and cycle the power OFF. Insert the

PCMCIA card.

5. Turn the power ON and press ENABLE. Upon Enabling,

if a Program Net is detected on the card, the OMP-

MODL will automatically be reprogrammed with this

Program Net and start logging data to the card.

6. Proper execution can be confirmed via the LCD Status

display of Program Name, current operational state, etc.

PCMCIA - MISCELLANEOUS

Formatting PCMCIA cards

Before a PCMCIA card can be used in the OMP-MODL system, it must be

properly formatted and prepared. As supplied from Omega Engineering

Incorporated, PCMCIA cards are already formatted and prepared however,

this procedure is fully supported under HyperWare.

To format and prepare and new card, insert it into the PC-1 drive and

double-click on the PD-1 graphic. HyperWare will detect that the card has

not been formatted nor prepared and a dialog will respond accordingly.

Selecting YES at the request will automatically format the card using the

TCFORMAT.EXE utility from the CardTalk directory, then the 3 required files

(FORMAT.MEM, DATA.MEM, and NET.MEM) will be copied onto the

PCMCIA card.

Windows 95 - Special PCMCIA Card Considerations

In systems running Windows 95, HyperWare cannot format the card by

calling the TCFORMAT command. To format the card, open a DOS window

(Start\Programs\MS-Dos Prompt) and manually run the TCFORMAT

command with the following syntax:

TCFORMAT X: where X is the PD-1 drive letter

After the card has been tcformatted, the copying the three support files can

be completed from within HyperWare. Launch HyperWare and double-click

on the drive, then follow the ensuing dialogs.

MEMORY CARD HANDLING / MAINTENANCE

The MC series memory cards are packaged in a protective metal case, however

reasonable care should be exercised in the handling and use of the cards. The card

should not be exposed to water, extremely high or low temperatures (eg on the dash

of a car on a sunny day), or dirt/mud... especially on the connector end.

6-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

The MC-XX memory cards utilize an internal lithium cell (Panasonic BR-2325, 3V or

equivalent) for power when not installed in the OMP-MODL or the PD-1 drive at the

PC location. This lithium cell should be replaced yearly for maximum data integrity.

Data in memory will be maintained for up to 2 hours with the battery removed from

the compartment, however it is highly recommended that any valuable data in the

card be downloaded before replacing the battery.

To replace the cell:

1. Locate a clean area to work.

2. Visually locate the battery access door and lock located on the

end of the memory card opposite the connector end.

1. Using a paper clip or other small probe, slide the Lock pin away

from the embossed LOCK mark.

Battery Compartment Door

Read Only

Read and Write

ML127

Lithium Cell

Access Door

Figure 6... -1: Memory Card lithium cell access and Write Protect Switch

2. Swing open and remove the battery compartment door . The

lithium cell can then be removed.

3. Slide the new cell into the compartment insuring the positive (+)

side of the cell is toward the top of the card.

USING THE OMP-MODL

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

4. Carefully insert the battery door and swing it closed.

5. Slide the Lock pin to the LOCK position.

6-10

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6... PCMCIA CARD CONFIGURATION AND USE

USING THE MODULOGGER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-1

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

OVERVIEW

The OMP-MODL operates in the field based on a program loaded into its memory

called a Program Net (Figure 7... -1). The Program Net provides instructions for the

OMP-MODL including which channels to sample, when to sample, how to process

the incoming signals, when to output alarms, and much more.

Figure 7... -1: Example Program Net

Development of a Program Net is done on a PC running HyperWare. After

development, the Program Net is uploaded directly to the OMP-MODL memory via a

serial communication link or indirectly via upload to a PCMCIA card. The PCMCIA

card can then be plugged into the OMP-MODL. Actual development of the Program

Net is performed in the HYPERNET WINDOW and the serial transfer of the Program

Net from the PC to the OMP-MODL (or to the PCMCIA card) is performed from

within the HYPERCOMM WINDOW.

Program Nets are developed through the following sequence of steps:

Create a new Program Net file for the connected OMP-MODL

(which automatically determines the installed hardware in the

connected OMP-MODL)

Add desired functions to the Program Net by dragging various

icons onto the HyperNet workspace

Add connections between icon terminals indicating signal flow

Configure the various icon options (eg Celcius or Fahrenheit,

type of thermocouple, filtering, equations, etc)

Configure the Global icon

Save the Program Net and/or transfer it to a connected OMP-

MODL for execution.

This chapter describes the HyperNet development environment and provides

detailed instruction on constructing Program Nets. Detailed icon configuration

information is provided in the Master Icon Reference in Appendix A. For the

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

technically curious, additional information on the theory of operation of Program

Nets is available in Appendix G.

AN EXAMPLE PROGRAM NET

A simple Program Net is shown in Figure 7... -2. In this Program Net, two

thermocouple inputs (represented by the two matching icons near the left of the

workspace) are sampled periodically (based on the Sample Rate Clock connected to

the top of each of the Thermocouple icons) and their values are stored in OMP-

MODL memory (RAM chip icons). Additionally, the difference between the two

thermocouple channels is calculated (by the Math icon) and stored in memory.

Figure 7... -2: Temperature sampling Program Net

7-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

HYPERNET DEVELOPMENT WINDOW FEATURES AND TOOLS

Accessing the HyperNet Window

To enter the HYPERNET WINDOW from within the HYPERCOMM WINDOW, click

on the HYPERNET button on the toolbar. The HyperNet Window will open

(Figure 7... -4) displaying the last edited Net or a blank screen if no Net has

been opened since HyperWare ws launched..

Figure 7...

-3:

HyperNet

window

button

Figure 7... -4: HyperNet, Program Net development window

Returning to the HyperComm Window

From within the HyperNet Window, to return to the HyperComm Window,

click on the HyperComm button at the left end of toolbar.

HyperNet Window Topology

When the HyperNet Window opens, a default Net or the last edited Net will

be displayed on the workspace (Figure 7... -4). Use the slide bars at the

right edge and bottom of the workspace to shift the display.

At the top of the window is a Menu Bar and below that, an Button / Icon Tool

Bar. Passing the cursor over the various icons results in a short descriptor

display on the Status Bar at the lower left corner of the window.

Descriptions of the main button / icon groups follow:

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

HyperComm Access

A single click returns the screen to the HyperComm Window. If the

Program Net currently displayed in the workspace has been

changed, a dialog will open prompting the User with an option to

save the edited Program Net.

Figure 7... -5:

Return to

Create New Net

HyperComm

button

Clicking on New Net will automatically query the Logger, then

update the workspace display showing icons for the connected

Logger’s hardware configuration including any User installed

modules and options. This requires a serial connection between the

Logger and the PC. To have a serial connection, the Logger and the

PC must be linked via RS-232 or Modem and the connection must

be established from within the HyperComm Window (Chapter 5).

Figure 7...

-6: New Net

button

Open Net and Save Net

Clicking on the Open Net button (or selecting File/Open Net from the

menu bar) results in the opening of the standard File Open dialog

box with the default file sort set to *.NET. Previously saved

Program Nets can be retrieved.

The Save Net button will save the currently displayed Program Net

to disk under the current Program Net filename with the extension

*.NET. If a filename has not been assigned, the standard File Save

As dialog box will open, allowing for User input of a Program Net

filename.

Figure 7...

-7: Open

and Save

Nets

TIP: Use the drop down menu selection `File / Save Net

As’ to save Nets with a different filename.

Delete Icon or Connection (Link)

To delete a connection (link) between icons, click on the Delete icon

(the Status Bar will display Select Object to Delete and the cursor

will change shape) then on one of the ends of the connection to be

deleted. (To select the end, the cursor must be over the icon

terminal). To delete another connection, repeat the procedure. If

multiple connections originate at an icon terminal, they will all be

deleted.

Figure 7...

-8: Delete

Button

To delete an icon, click on the Delete button and then on the icon to

be deleted. If an icon is deleted, all connections into and out of the

icon will also be deleted.

If the Delete function has been selected and no items are to be

deleted, clicking on any open space in the workspace will disable the

Delete function.

7-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

Program Net Icon Selection Bar

Included in the Program Net Icon Bar is a collection of various icons

to be used in the development of Program Nets. Clicking on the

arrows at the left and right edge of the bar will scroll the bar left or

right displaying additional icons.

Figure 7... -9: Icon assortment (with scroll arrows at each end)

PROGRAM NET CONSTRUCTION

Program Nets are developed in HyperNet and saved as files with the filename

extension *.NET.

Program Nets must be developed to match the existing hardware installed in the

target OMP-MODL. For example a Program Net that uses a MLIM-2 Frequency

Input Channel will only work in a OMP-MODL that has a MLIM-2 installed.

Configuration details that must match include:

Interface Modules - Program Nets must match the OMP-MODL

installed Interface Module types.

Port - The Port (I/O Module location) used in the Program Net

and the Port used for an Interface Module in the OMP-MODL

must match.

Channel Configurations - Interface Modules equipped with

hardware configuration switches must have their switches set to

match the Program Net on a channel by channel basis.

For Example: If an MLIM-1 is installed in Port 3 and has

the Channel B configured (via the Channel B hardware

configuration switch) for VDC-HI, then any Program Net

loaded into the OMP-MODL must have Channel 3B used

as a VDC-HI channel (or optionally, not used).

If a Program Net that does not match the target OMP-MODL hardware

configuration is uploaded to the OMP-MODL memory, a configuration

mismatch error will display and the upload will not occur. This checking of

compatibility is handled automatically within HyperWare during the upload

process and insures that hardware and software compatibility exists.

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

TIP: Users that have a number of OMP-MODLs in use

may find it convenient to create a subdirectory in their

HyperWare directory for each of the OMP-MODLs with

which they work. The subdirectory names may correlate

to the OMP-MODL ID or Unit Name which are User

programmed (See HyperNet Programming in Chapter 7).

As Program Nets are developed for each OMP-MODL or

configuration, they can then be saved into the

corresponding subdirectory.

To Develop a New Program Net...

To develop a new Program Net, the target OMP-MODL hardware

configuration must be known. After configuring the OMP-MODL hardware

as required for the data logging application (ie installing modules, setting

channel configuration switches, etc), establish a serial connection to the

OMP-MODL from the HyperComm Window.

Switch to the HyperNet Window and click on the Create New Net button and

the connected OMP-MODL will be automatically polled for its hardware

configuration. The workspace will update and show icons representing the

standard System Base hardware and any User installed hardware.

Before editing of the workspace begins, this unconnected Program Net

should be saved to disk by clicking on the File Save button or using the `File

/ Save Net As’ selection from the menu. This unconnected Program Net can

then be used as a starting Net for development of varying Program Nets

based on the same OMP-MODL configuration.

As Program Nets are developed, they should be saved with a filename

different from this basic Program Net. Use the `File / Save Net As’ drop-

down menu to save Nets with different filenames.

To Open an Existing Net for Editing...

If a previously developed Program Net is to be edited, open the Program

Net file by clicking on the Open File button and selecting the desired file.

Icon Placement

To add an icon from the Tool Bar to the workspace, click on the desired icon

and while holding the mouse button down, drag the icon onto the workspace.

Release the button when the icon is positioned in the approximate desired

location. Icons can be relocated within the workspace by the same

technique... even after connections have been made.

The Icon Toolbar contains more icons than are visually displayed at the top

of the window. To see additional icons, click on the left and right arrows at

the ends of the boolbar to spin to additional icons.

The HyperNet workspace utilizes dynamic panning. As an icon (or

connection) is dragged near the edge of the screen, the workspace will pan.

Using Grids

If desired, a grid structure can be enabled on the workspace that

provides a visual grid and/or `snap to grid’ function. Select `Options

/ Grid’ and select the desired operation.

7-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

The Snap function is merely an aid to align icons neatly within the

workspace.

Changing Fonts

Labeling text surrounds icons as they are placed. The font, size,

color and effects used for this text can be changed through the drop-

down menu `Options / Font’ and its corresponding dialog.

Icons

Icons are the main building blocks used in the development of a Program

Net. Icons within a Program Net graphically represent different items

ranging from hardware input channels to intermediate processing functions

to hardware outputs and more. A partial listing of available HyperNet icons

is in Table 7... -1.

NOTE: A complete icon listing with detailed setup and application

information is supplied for reference in Appendix A.

Input Icons

VDC-LO

Output Icons

Relay Output

Pager Alarm

LCD Message

Digital Output

+5Volt Output

Memory

Processing Icons

Math

Special Icons

Sample Rate Clock

Global Settings

Warm-Up Timer

CJC

Delta Function

Average Function

Thermocouple

Event

Count Accumulator Probe Point

Frequency

Count

Comparator

Periodic Output

Logical AND

Integral Function

Start/Stop Clock

Table 7... -1: Partial listing of icon functions available for Program Net

construction

Icon Topology

Icons share many similar features including their graphic

appearance (input and output terminals, etc) and configuration

techniques. Figure 7... -10 shows the topology of an icon with its

various terminals.

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

ENABLE Input

UPDATE Input

X Input

DATA or LOGIC

Icon

Graphic

OUTPUT of

DATA or LOGIC

Y Input

DATA or LOGIC

ML128

OUTPUT of UPDATE SIGNAL

Figure 7... -10: HyperNet Icon topology and terminal types

TERMINALS

All icons (except the Global Icon) have terminals for the addition

of signal connections. An explanation for the various types of

terminals follows:

LOGIC / DATA INPUT TERMINALS

On the left side of the icon are typically one or two inputs for

Logic or Data signal types. Data enters the icon for

processing through these Input terminals. Some two input

icons (eg Math) do not require signals to be connected to

both Input terminals for operation.

LOGIC / DATA OUTPUT TERMINAL

On the right side of the icon is a single Output terminal.

After processing of an input signal(s) is completed, the

output is updated. Depending on the type of icon and the

User configuration, this Output terminal may or may not be

updated every time the Update and/or an Input terminal is

updated. The Enable input (description follows), the type of

processing that the icon performs, and User specified

parameters within the Configuration dialog all effect when

the Output terminal is updated.

For example, when using an Average icon, the Output

terminal will only be updated with a new value after a User

specified number of inputs have been averaged.

ENABLE INPUT TERMINAL

Many icons have an Enable input terminal located near their

top left corner that will accept a Logic input (True/False).

Depending on the state of the input signal, the icon is

enabled or disabled for processing.

NOTE: if the Enable input is not connected, it

defaults to the Enabled state.

7-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

A simple application of the Enable input might be in an

engine temperature recording application. A Thermocouple

icon may be enabled / disabled by a Logic signal that is True

when the engine ignition is ON. With this configuration,

temperature recording will only occur when the engine is

running.

The Enable input can also be used for optimizing the speed

of Program Nets and/or minimizing the amount of data

collected as the processing normally done by an icon in a

Program Net is not performed if the Enable input is False.

For example, a Program Net may be built that has several

input temperatures that are scanned on a fairly high speed

basis. By use of the Enable terminal, the data flow to OMP-

MODL memory may be disabled during normal operating

conditions and enabled when abnormal temperature

readings are detected.

UPDATE INPUT TERMINAL

The Input signal icons (Thermocouple, VDC, GPDI, etc) are

all equipped with an Update input terminal located in the

center top of the graphic. Whenever this Update terminal

receives an Update command, it proceeds to update its

output terminal value (assuming that its Enable terminal is

True or not connected).

UPDATE OUTPUT TERMINAL

The Sample Rate Clock and the Warm-up icon have a

special output terminal located at the bottom center of the

graphic called an Update output terminal. This terminal

sends a command to the connected icon to Update its

output (eg take a sample, process an equation, etc).

Details on the Sample Rate Clock and the Warmup icon are

covered in the Master Icon Reference in Appendix A .

Configuring Icons

Most of the icons within HyperWare must be configured before they

can be used. User configuration entails selection of various icon

operational parameters such as names, input ranges, sampling

rates, etc and is simply done through dialog boxes associated with

each icon.

To configure an icon that has been placed on the workspace,

double-click on the graphic and an Icon Configuration dialog box will

appear. Each icon has a unique dialog box with programmable

parameters to meets its needs. However, many parameters are

common to the different types of icons. A Thermocouple Input icon

Configuration Dialog is shown in Figure 7... -11 and a description of

configuration parameters typically seen in a configuration dialog box

follow.

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

Various standard Windows techniques are used to select the

different parameters within the dialog box from text entry and editing

to selection via radio buttons.

Figure 7... -11: Thermocouple input icon configuration

dialog box

ICON NAME

Each icon can have an 8 character name assigned that displays

on the workspace under the icon.

OUTPUT NAME

The output signal can be assigned an 8 character name which

displays above the Output Terminal of the icon. This name is

commonly referenced by icons connected to this Output terminal.

For example, if this Thermocouple icon were connected to one

of a Math icon’s input terminals, the name Tinlet would be

referenced within the Math icon as an Input terminal name.

UNITS

Many of the icons can output their signals with various units such

as Degrees C or F, V or mV, Degrees or Ohms, etc. Radio

buttons are typically used to select one of the Unit types.

SIGNAL TYPE OR RANGE

This Thermocouple icon supports 6 different types of

thermocouple. Similarly, other icons have User configurable

ranges or types.

OTHER PARAMETERS

Most of the icons have additional parameters such as filtering,

equations, data types, etc that are all User programmable.

7-10

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

Icon Assortment

A complete reference listing of all of the icons available within HyperWare is

included in the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A. Details on Configuration,

applications, and proper usage are described.

Global Icon

One special icon that is included in every Program Net is called the Global

icon. Within the Global icon’s Configuration dialog are options for various

global Program Net options. These options include Program Net Name,

memory utilization mode, clock resolution, and modem paramteres. The

operation of this icon should be reviewed in the Master Icon Reference in

Appendix A before attempting to construct a Program Net.

Figure 7... -

12: Global

icon

Making Connections Between Icons

Lines are used within a Program Net to indicate the flow of signals between

icons. (See Figure 7... -1)

Signal Types

Three types of signals can be communicated between icons in a

Program Net. The three signal types are differentiated by color and

their different functions follow:

DATA (RED)

Numerical values are transmitted from icon to icon via Data type

signal connections. HyperNet allows Data connections to be

made ONLY between Data terminals on icons to preclude

mismatching of signal types.

SIGNALS COMMUNICATED VIA

DATA TYPE CONNECTIONS

EXAMPLE ICONS WITH DATA TYPE

TERMINALS

TEMPERATURE

VOLTAGE

PRESSURE

FLOW

OUTPUTS FROM THERMOCOUPLE ICONS

OUTPUTS FROM VOLTAGE ICONS

MATH (INPUTS AND OUTPUTS)

INPUTS TO COMPARATORS

OUTPUTS FROM COUNTERS

Table 7... -2: Example Data type signals and Icons

LOGIC (GREEN)

True / False values are transmitted from icon to icon via Logic

type signal connections. Logic signals have only two states. As

with the other signal types, HyperNet only allows Logic signals to

be connected to Logic type terminals on icons.

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

SIGNALS COMMUNICATED VIA

LOGIC TYPE CONNECTIONS

EXAMPLE ICONS WITH LOGIC TYPE

TERMINALS

TRUE OR FALSE CONDITIONS

INPUTS TO RELAY ALARM ICONS

OUTPUTS FROM COMPARATORS

ENABLE INPUTS TO SAMPLE RATE CLOCKS

INPUT TO MESSAGE ICON

OUTPUT FROM START/STOP CLOCK

INPUTS TO COUNTERS

Table 7... -3: Example Logic type signals and icons

UPDATE (BLUE)

Update commands are a special type of signal that is generated

ONLY by Sample Rate Clock icons. This signal is connected to

the Update input on icons and commands them to update their

outputs. As with the other signal types, HyperNet only allows

Update signals to be connected to Update type terminals on

icons.

SIGNALS COMMUNICATED VIA

UPDATE TYPE CONNECTIONS

EXAMPLE ICONS WITH UPDATE TYPE

TERMINALS

THE UPDATE COMMAND

GENERTED BY THE SAMPLE RATE

CLOCK ICON

INPUT ICONS HAVE AN UPDATE TERMINAL

Table 7... -4: Example Update signals and icons

Adding Signal Connections Between Icons

Connections between two icons are drawn by locating the mouse

cursor over the first icon’s terminal (note how the cursor changes

when properly located over a terminal), clicking and holding the

button down, then dragging a connection line to the second icon’s

terminal and releasing the button.

The direction that signal connections can be dragged on the

workspace is limited to minimize potential problems with feedback

and/or race conditions. Connections can only be drawn from the left

to the right on the workspace.

During the connection process, HyperNet checks and disallows

recognized illegal connections such as:

Differing terminal types cannot be interconnected. For

example, a Data terminal cannot be connected to a

Logic terminal.

Output terminals can only connect to Input or Enable

terminals.

Connections cannot be made between terminals on the

same icon

7-12

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

Multiple connections to a single Input terminal.

During the construction of Program Nets, it is common for multiple

connection lines to originate at an Output terminal, however most

icons can only have one or two inputs. Some icons such as the

Scroll Tracking and Destination File icons (used in the Post-

Processing and HyperTrack Windows) allow for more than two

inputs and will automatically add input terminals as connection lines

are added.

Modifying the Routing of Icon Connection Lines

The actual on-screen routing of the connections can be modified. In

some applications, the links may display across verbage (Icon

Names, Units, etc) making the verbage difficult to read. To modify

the route of a connection, from the menu bar, select TOOLS / VIEW

CONNECTORS. The HyperNet Window display will change slightly

showing a Connectors as small colored boxes overlaying the icon

terminals that have connections. By dragging and dropping these

connectors using the mouse and RIGHT BUTTON, the connection

line paths can be rerouted.

Saving the Net

After development of the Program Net, the program can be saved to a file

by clicking on the Save to Disk icon in the Toolbar.

NET PERFORMANCE

After construction of a Program Net a quick review should be done to insure that the

Net’s performance in the OMP-MODL will meet the User’s goal. This check should

include proper implementation and for higher speed applications, a processing

(execution) speed review.

Program Net Checklist

Has the Global Icon been configured? Has a Program Name

and Description been assigned?

Have connections been added between icons?

Have desired measurement units (eg C, F, ohms, etc) been

selected?

Does each icon have a name and output name? Names are not

necessary for the icons to function, however, if they are used

consistently during the construction of a Program Net, the

presence of a User defined name (vs the default name)

becomes an indicator that the icon has been configured.

Additionally, the added annotation makes comprehension of the

net by other Users and/or at a later date even easier.

Do the Memory icons have names assigned? If omitted, it may

be more difficult to identify data during plotting and further post-

processing.

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

Program Net Execution Speed

NOTE: The information presented in this section is

provided for Users that are attempting to collect data at

faster rates (such as Samples per Second).

Users utilizing the OMP-MODL for data collection at

slower rates (eg Samples per Minute) may opt to skip

this section and refer to it later when faster rates are

required.

Due to the nearly unlimited flexibility and potential variations of Program Net

designs, it is difficult to specify the actual speed performance of Program

Nets. In an attempt to relate to the OMP-MODL User a feel for the Program

Net processing speeds to be expected, the following guidelines are

presented.

Additionally, a number of example Program Nets are provided in Appendix B

with their approximate execution speeds. From this information, a feel for

the speed of execution of most Program Nets can be developed.

Program Net Performance Guidelines

The time required for a Program Net to execute within the OMP-

MODL is a function of a number of variables including:

Total number of icons in the Program Net - with a

greater number of icons to process each time the

Program Net loops, more time is required.

Type of icons - different types of icons require various

amounts of time to process. For example, a

Thermocouple input icon requires a considerable

amount of processing time to perform the analog to

digital conversions, CJC measurements, and the

associated math. On the other end of the speed

spectrum, a Data Memory icon merely stores data into a

memory location... an operation which can be performed

very quickly.

Program Net design - Program Nets can be developed

that have varying execution times that are a function of

inputs or values within the Net. A simple example of

this is a Program Net that scans a single digital input (eg

switch state) and only enables the logging of 10

thermocouple input channels when the switch is closed.

In this example, the digital input could be scanned very

fast when open, but when it closes, extra processing

time is required for the 10 thermocouple channels.

An Empirical Answer...

After optimization of a Program Net with consideration of the above

guidelines, the best way to determine the speed performance of a

Net is to upload it to a OMP-MODL and run it. If maximum speed is

the goal, the driving Sample Rate Clock rate can be set to a

minimum (eg 1mS) and the program can be tested. Review of the

data and actual sample times will result in a very accurate execution

rate value.

7-14

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

Following are three benchmark Program Net execution times that

can be used to gain a relative feel for the sampling rates achievable

with the OMP-MODL. The times were empirically determined with a

single channel (as specified) storing directly to memory. In each

case, the Program Net consists of one Sample Rate Clock icon, one

input channel icon, and one memory icon. No filtering was enabled.

Input Icon Type

Samples per Second

(one channel)

VDC-LO

150

Thermocouple Type J

Counter (GPDI)

320

Figure 7... -13: Approximate throughput rates for various

types of signals / Program Nets

Nets that utilize conditional logging strategies will have varying

execution rates. A feel for these Net execution rates can be

developed by constructing and running Program Nets that represent

each conditonal branch of the Net, then summing the execution

times for branches that can could execute simultaneously.

Miscellaneous Program Net Performance

Considerations

MISSED SAMPLES

Although it is possible to set Sample Rate Clock rates faster than

a Program Net can actually execute, the Program Nets will

attempt to run. In these conditions, if a Sample Rate Clock

sends the Update command before the Net has been fully

executed, the OMP-MODL will finish the Net execution then

immediately start processing the Net again.

The fact that an Update command has been processed late is

accessible to the User via the Warning icon. One of the options

within the Warning icon is to provide a logic output if a Sample is

Missed. Details on the Warning icon are provided in the Master

Icon Reference in Appendix A.

It must be noted that in this situation, although the actual data

has not been sampled at the programmed rate, all collected data

will include the actual date/time that the Net executed.

TIP: To achieve maximum speed of a Program

Net, the Sample Rate Clock(s) used in the Net

can be set to a rate faster than the Net can

possibly process.

OTHER DETRIMENTS TO SPEED

Any additional processing that is performed during execution of a

Program Net such as serial communication (eg HyperTrack

operation, Status Queries, etc) and/or display of readings through

the OMP-MODL front panel LCD will have detrimental effects on

the rate at which a Program Net can execute. For optimum

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

speed,wthe LCD should not be displaying updating information

(eg Probe Points, battery voltage, etc).

PROGRAM NET DOCUMENTATION

Two features are provided within the HyperNet Window to assist in documenting and

the ensuing field wiring of the OMP-MODL.

HyperNet Printout

The actual Program Net display can be printed by selecting Print Net from

the File menu.

NOTE: The PC must be set to 256 color mode in order

to properly print the Net.

Terminal Strip Wiring Printout

A Terminal Strip Wiring listing can be generated and printed for the Program

Net. This listing can then be used during the field wiring of the various I/O

signals to the logger terminal strips.

Upon completion of the Program Net, select View Wiring/Connection list

from the File menu, enter a filename, and the file will be generated and

saved as an ASCII text file. A text editor will automatically open the file.

The listing can then be printed from within the editor and carried with the

OMP-MODL to the installation site.

The Wiring Listing includes the connections for each of the I/O channels that

is used in the Program Net as well as standard connections for External

Power, the Digital Port and the CJC connector. Names assigned to Input

and Output icons in the Program Net are used for channel identification.

At the bottom of the Wiring I/O Listing are various notes relative to other

connections such as modem. These notes are imported from a file called

NOTES.TXT which is supplied in HyperWare. Reminders and special

installation comments can be added by the User to the NOTES.TXT file by

editing the file with any text editor (such as Notepad). After editing, the

revisions will appear on the WiringListing each time a listing is generated

from within HyperNet.

PROGRAM NET UPLOAD TO THE OMP-MODL

After the Program Net has been checked and saved, clicking on the HyperComm

Window button will return HyperWare to the HyperComm Window. The Program Net

icon displayed on the PC graphic represents the last edited Program Net. Drag and

drop the Program Net icon from the PC to the serially connected OMP-MODL or to

the PCMCIA card drive to upload the new Program Net.

Refer to Chapter 5, HyperComm Serial Communications for details of the Program

Net serial link uploading procedure or to Chapter 6 for details on using the PCMCIA

card.

7-16

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7... HYPERNET™ ICON BASED PROGRAMMING

NOTES:

USING THE OMP-MODL

7-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8... POST-PROCESSING OF COLLECTED DATA

OVERVIEW

Once data has been collected by the OMP-MODL and downloaded to a OMP-MODL

Download file on the PC, a number of powerful data analysis and viewing options

are available from within HyperWare. (See HyperComm, Chapter 5 for details on

downloading data from the OMP-MODL).

The Post-Processing window within HyperWare provides the capability to `post-

process’ (ie process after collection) data in the following ways:

Graphically plot collected data using HyperPlot

Merge data from separate logging sessions into a single file for

Before and After type performance comparisons

Save HyperPlot graphs to bitmap (*.BMP) files allowing

seamless inclusion into other Windows applications such as

wordprocessors and spreadsheets

Convert collected data into an Excel Version 4 (*.XLS) file

Convert collected data into a date/time annotated ASCII (*.TXT)

file

Algebraically manipulate collected data and save to a new

OMP-MODL Download, Excel, or text file.

HyperPlot is a powerful graphing module included in HyperWare that can be used for

immediate plotting of collected data.

File conversions and algebraic manipulation of collected data are handled by

constructing a Post-Processing Net which converts downloaded data from a OMP-

MODL Download file to another User defined file/format.

POST-PROCESSING NETS

Post-Processing Nets provide a means to convert OMP-MODL Download files to

various formats and, if desired, perform additional algebraic processing of collected

data as it is converted to the new file format.

USING THE OMP-MODL

8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8... POST-PROCESSING OF COLLECTED DATA

A Post-Processing Net is constructed much the same way as a Program Net is

developed within HyperNet. The main difference is that a Program Net running in a

Figure 8...

OMP-MODL receives its data from various hardware channels such as

thermocouples, then saves the collected data to OMP-MODL memory. In contrast,

Post-Processing Net receives its data from a OMP-MODL Download file, processes

the data, then saves the data in a destination file format. Figure 8... -1 shows a

completed Post-Processing Net.

To perform a file conversion and view / analyze the collected data, the following

steps are required:

Switch to the Post-Processing window

Open a OMP-MODL Download file and construct a Post-

Processing Net with icons and connections

Specify the destination file format(s)

Start the Post-Processing (ie run the Post-Processing Net)

Launch the desired data review/analysis application (eg

HyperPlot, Excel, Notepad, etc)

8-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OST-P

COLLECTED ATA

Entering the Post-Processing window

and HyperWare will change to the Post-Processing window, Figure 8... -3.

Figure 8...

-2: Post-

Processing

button

Figure 8... -3: Post-Processing window

Constructing a Post-Processing Net

connection techniques as used during construction of a OMP-MODL

Program Net (Chapter 7) or a HyperTrack Net (Chapter 10).

Opening a OMP-MODL Download File (*.HLD)

The first step in Post-Processing of a OMP-MODL Download file is

to open the file to be processed. A source OMP-MODL Download

file containing the OMP-MODL collected data is opened by clicking

on the Open OMP-MODL Download File button on the toolbar.

Selecting the desired file will result in a display of Memory icons on

the left side of the Post-Processing workspace. Each of the icons

represents a channel of logged data contained within the OMP-

MODL Download file.

Figure 8...

-4: Open

Download

File button

Reviewing File Information

After a Download file has been opened, the File Information entered

at the time of Download can be reviewed. To see the Title and

comments entered, select File/Data File Information from the menu.

The comments are read-only and cannot be edited from within this

window, however comments can be highlighted and copied/pasted

to other documents.

OMP-MODL

8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8... POST-PROCESSING OF COLLECTED DATA

Adding Icons

Two icons are available on the Icon Toolbar for use in construction

of the Post-Processing Net; a Math icon and a File icon.

MATH ICON

The Math icon provides algebraic processing of data as it passes

from input to output. In Figure 8... -1, the Math icon is providing

a differential temperature calculation and generating a third data

channel, Delta-T, which is then stored to the destination file.

Figure 8...

-5: Math

icon

Double-click on the icon to open its configuration dialog box. See

the Master Icon Listing in Appendix A for configuration details.

DESTINATION FILE ICON

The Destination File icon represents storage to file of all signals

connected to its inputs. Up to 36 inputs can be connected to the

File icon when it is used as an Excel file or 24 when used as an

ASCII file. Each time a User adds a connection, an additional

input terminal appears.

Figure 8... -

Destination

File icon

Double-clicking on the icon opens its Configuration dialog box.

With the dialog box, the destination file data format can be

specified as ASCII (*.TXT), OMP-MODL Download (*.HLD), or

Version 4.0 Excel spreadsheet (*.XLS) format. See the Master

Icon Listing in Appendix A for configuration details.

Multiple File icons can be connected in a net for simultaneous

storage of different signals and/or multiple file formats.

Connecting Icons

Icons are connected using the standard drag and drop connection

method as used for construction of HyperNet Program Nets. The

order of connections made to the Destination File icon determines

their sequence in the resulting file.

Unconnected Memory icons will not be processed nor included in the

Destination File.

Other Post-Processing Net Development Options

As in the development of a Program Net from within HyperNet,

various tools such as Grid, Snap, and Print Net options are available

from the Menu Bar.

Saving the Post-Processing Net

Upon completion of the Net, it can be saved for later use with the menu

selection File/Save Net As or with the Save Net button. The saved Post-

Processing Net can then be opened at a later time for conversion of

additional OMP-MODL Download files that have the same channel

configuration and filename.

Figure 8...

-7: Save

Net button

An Example: Every day, a OMP-MODL is downloaded

and the data is run through the same Post-Processing

Net which converts the data to an Excel spreadsheet. A

Post-Processing Net could be constructed once and

saved with the filename CONVERT.PST.

8-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8... POST-PROCESSING OF COLLECTED DATA

Each day, when the data is downloaded from the OMP-

MODL, a new filename is given to the OMP-MODL

Download file (eg Monday.hld, Tuesday.hld,

From within the Post-Processing window, the Post-

Processing Net CONVERT.PST can then be opened, the

Processing Net will automatically check for compatibility,

then connect to the open OMP-MODL Download file and

TARTING A P

-PROCESSING ESSION

To start the conversion, click on the Green Start button

dialog will display as the file conversion proceeds.

Figure 8...

-8: Start

Processing

VIEWING THE ONVERTED D

After the processing of the Net is complete, the converted data file can be viewed

immediately by double-clicking on the Destination File icon. The application

type will be launched as specified under the Options/Paths

HyperComm window and the converted file will be loaded automatically.

Options / Paths

Selecting the

menu from the menu-bar in the HyperComm

program filenames to use during the viewing of files from within the Post-

Processing window. A text window is provided for User entry of the default

*.XLS destinations files) and for a text editor (eg Notepad for viewing *.txt

destination files). Note that the Window Notepad application is for viewing

text editor to the DOS “EDIT.COM” or another text editor with large file

capabilities.

has been configured for a OMP-MODL Download file

format (*.HLD), double-clicking on the icon will launch HyperPlot.

text file, it can also be opened without the use of HyperWare from within the

respective application’s normal Open file commands

A S

HYPER LOT...

Download file, HyperPlot can be used without construction of a Post-Processing Net.

button in the Tool Bar. The OMP-MODL Download file to be viewed can then be

FILE/Open View menu.

Figure 8...

-9:

HyperPlot

button

USING THE OMP-MODL

8-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8... POST-PROCESSING OF COLLECTED DATA

MERGING OF DOWNLOAD FILES

Through a special function in the Post-Processing Window, two Download files can

be merged into a single Destination file. This is a powerful feature that can be used

for generating Before and After type performance plots with HyperPlot.

For example, a pressure and temperature data logging session could be run on a

process prior to process improvements being made. After the improvements have

been made, the logging session could be repeated (using the same Program Net for

comparison consistency). The data from the Before and After sessions could then

be combined into a single file. This resulting file can then be plotted using

HyperPlot. From within HyperPlot, individual plots times can be shifted, allowing for

registration and comparison of the Before and After performance data.

The File Merge Process...

Two Download files can be opened and combined (merged) in the Post-

Processing window as follows:

1. Open the first Download file in the usual manner by

double-clicking on the Open Download File button (or

selecting File/Open Download Data File from the menu

bar).

File Information can be viewed by selecting the File/Data

File Information choice from the Menu Bar.

2. Open the second Download file by selecting File/Open

Secondary Data File from the drop-down Menu Bar. A

second group of Memory icons will display within the

window.

File Information on this second Source file can be viewed

by selecting the File/Data File Information choice from

the Menu Bar and clicking on NO.

3. Drag and drop a Destination File icon onto the

workspace and add connections from the Memory icons

(to be included in the Destination File) to the Destination

File icon.

Double-click on the Destination File icon and specify a

filename and type of file.

4. Click on the Start Post-Processing (green flag) button

and the files will be merged into one Destination File.

Merged File Characteristics

After a Merge of two Download files, the resulting file will contain data and

Channel Names from both the First and the Second source files. However,

additional File Information such as Starting Time/Date, comments, etc. will

be pulled from ONLY the first source file. Additionally, both file’s channel

data will adjusted to start at the same date/time.

8-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8... P

-P

OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

HyperPlot is an integral sub-program of HyperWare that provides graphic data

display of 1 to 7 channels of OMP-MODL collected data versus time (Figure 9... -1).

Autoscaling, zoom/unzoom, data analysis, and bitmap file (*.BMP) generation are all

provided features of HyperPlot. HyperPlot displays data from the standard OMP-

MODL Download file format (*.HLD).

Presented in this chapter is information on launching the HyperPlot program, details

on using the various display options, and methods used for outputting graphed data

for inclusion into reports or printing.

Figure 9... -1: HyperPlot graphic data display

LAUNCHING HYPERPLOT

The HyperPlot program can be launched in a number of different ways:

Directly from the HyperComm Window for an immediate review

of data just downloaded from the OMP-MODL.

From the Post-Processing window for general use.

After processing of data through a Post-Processing Net

USING THE OMP-MODL

9-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

From HyperComm...

After data has been downloaded from a OMP-MODL to a OMP-MODL

Download file (*.HLD) on the PC, the data can be immediately viewed with

HyperPlot. After the Download file has been saved to PC disk, a Memory

icon will display overlaying the PC graphic in the HyperComm Window.

Double-clicking on this Memory icon will immediately launch HyperPlot. The

first seven channels of data contained within the just Downloaded file will be

automatically plotted with auto-scaled time and magnitude axis.

From Post-Processing Window

For general use, HyperPlot can be launched from the Post-Processing

window of HyperWare. Click on the Post-Processing button from the

HyperComm Window and HyperWare will change to the Post-Processing

window.

Figure 9...

-2: Launch

HyperPlot

button

Clicking on the Launch HyperPlot button opens the HyperPlot window, at

which time a OMP-MODL Download file can be opened (details follow).

From a Post-Processing Net

If a Post-Processing Net is constructed that utilizes a Destination File icon

with a *.HLD format, HyperPlot can be launched by double-clicking on the

Destination File icon immediately after running the net. HyperPlot will start

and the first seven channels of data contained within the Destination File will

auto-scaled and plotted.

Figure 9... -

Destination

File icon

HYPERPLOT WINDOW OVERVIEW

When HyperPlot starts, the window shown in Figure 9... -1 displays (with or without

data graphed). Details on the various components of the HyperPlot window follow.

Time Axis

A horizontal axis is used for display of time. The time can be displayed in

elapsed or absolute modes with either linear or logarithmic scaling.

Data Axis

Up to seven vertical axes can be displayed on a single plot, each with

unique scaling. At the bottom of each axis is the data channel name and

units assigned during construction of the net (to the Memory icon). Upon

initial display, the axes are auto-scaled to allow the data to fit on the

workspace. If required, scaling may be expressed with scientific notation

(engineering format) and the multiplier will appear near the top of the

appropriate axis.

Slide Bars

Slide bars are displayed at the right side and the bottom of the window which

can be used for panning vertically and horizontally. Drag the slide button or

click on the arrows at each end of the slide bars to pan the display.

9-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

Zooming

Areas of a plot can be enlarged via the HyperPlot Zooming feature. To

zoom into an area of interest, a rectangular outline can be drawn around a

region using the mouse and the display will change to fill the window with the

outlined plot... auto-scaling time and channel data axes as necessary.

To zoom into a region:

1. Locate the mouse on one corner of the rectangular area

to be defined.

2. While holding the left mouse button down, drag a

rectangular box around the region to be enlarged.

3. Release the mouse button and the outlined area will fill

the screen.

To zoom out, use the Zoom All or Zoom Last commands under the

Calculations menu (see following Menu bar details).

Menu Bar

The Menu bar along the top edge of the HyperPlot window provides User

control of the plotting features within HyperPlot.

HYPERPLOT MENU BAR

The conventional Windows menu bar techniques are used to load files for plotting,

modify plotting parameters, and output plots. Descriptions of the features within

each menu follow:

File

Open View

Loads a new OMP-MODL Download file for plotting.

Save as Bitmap

Outputs the currently displayed screen view as a Windows bitmap

file. The bitmap file format is readily integrated into other software

applications. When selected, a filename is requested and the file

extension *.BMP is appended.

Print View

Outputs the currently displayed screen view to the Windows default

printer.

Data File Information

Displays the Title and comments entered into the Download file at

the time of Download from the OMP-MODL or PCMCIA card. From

this window, the Title displayed at the top of Plots can be edited.

Calculations

Zoom All

Returns the view to show all of the data file.

USING THE OMP-MODL

9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

Zoom Last

Returns the view to show the last level of zoom

Cursor

Brings a vertical cursor onto the view. The cursor shows on the left

edge of the screen with a small triangle displaying just above the

time axis. The cursor can be moved by locating the mouse cursor

over the vertical line (the cursor will change to a double-ended

arrow) then clicking the left mouse button and dragging the cursor

left and right.

At the right edge of the view, the time and channel values

intersected by the cursor will be displayed.

NOTE: When zoomed into a sufficient level that individual

data points can be discerned on the screen, the cursor

will appear to hop from data point to data point.

If mismatched sampling rates were used during data

collection, displayed cursor values not on actual data

points will utilize linear interpolation for the value.

Analyze View

Analyze View provides a quick display of the average, minimum

value, maximum value, and the time integral for each data channel

for the currently displayed view. This dialog can be copied to the

Windows clipboard (hit <alt> P while the dialog is displayed) and

then pasted into another application.

Options

X-Axis

The Time (X-Axis) axis can be displayed in a number of different

formats at the User’s discretion. Selecting the X-Axis menu results

in a dialog box allowing for User specification of the following

options.

TIME FORMAT

Selection of the appropriate radio buttons

HH:MM:SS or Seconds Time Base; specifies the time

display format for Hours, Minutes and Seconds, or in

Seconds only.

Elapsed or Absolute Time display; With Elapsed

mode, the time display starts with Time 0 as the time of

the first data sample. With Absolute mode, the time

and date when the OMP-MODL stored the sample is

used.

Linear or Logarithmic; The X-axis is scaled linearly or

on a base 10 log scale.

9-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

TIME INTERVAL

Using the provided Time Interval text box, the time base

(essentially a manual time base zoom function) can be manually

specified. The entered value in units (approximate) will be used

for the time window displayed in a single view. For example, if

the value is entered as 60, the HyperPlot view will be time

zoomed to display approximately 60 units (seconds, hours, etc)

in a single full screen view.

TIME SHIFT

Individual channel plots can be shifted in time from milliseconds

to days. Following the example format, in a Channel’s text box,

enter in the time to shift that plot.

The Time Shift capability can be very convenient for time

registering (aligning) plots of data within a Before / After Merged

file for easy graphic comparison. Refer to Chapter 8 for details

on generating a Merged file.

Figure 9... -4: HyperPlot Options / X-axis

Y-Axis

The Y-Axis dialog (Figure 9... -5) provides User control over grids,

scaling and symbols used during the plotting of data. Descriptions

of User selectable options follow:

USING THE OMP-MODL

9-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

CHANNEL NAME

The individual data channel names from the OMP-MODL

Download file are listed. The names are assigned when

developing a HyperNet and/or Post-Processing Net.

DISPLAY CHANNEL

Checking a data channel’s checkbox results in that channel being

plotted.

Figure 9... -5: Y-Axis configuration dialog

DISPLAY GRID

A row of radio buttons specifies to which channel’s Y-axis the

horizontal grid should be connected.

DISPLAY Y-AXIS

Checking a data channel’s Y-Axis checkbox results in that

channels Y-Axis being displayed. In many plots, it may only be

necessary to display a single Y-axis if the scaling is the same for

all channels. For example if four channels of temperature data

are being plotted and they all are scaled from 0 to 100F, only a

single Y-Axis is required, allowing more area for data display.

DISPLAY SYMBOLS

Check boxes are provided for the enabling of symbols for each

displayed channel.

SCALING AUTO / MANUAL

When a OMP-MODL Download file is first plotted, all channels

are autoscaled to fit on the screen. This auto-scaling feature can

be disabled by the User and a manual range specified by clicking

the Manual checkbox and entering a High and Low limit in the

Manual Ranges text boxes. (As a short-cut, editing of the

9-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

Manual Range text boxes automatically switches the Auto /

Manual checkbox to Manual).

To return to the Auto-scaling mode, merely click on the Auto

checkbox and the range will automatically be rescaled to fit the

screen.

UNITS

The individual data channel units from the OMP-MODL

Download file are listed. The units are assigned when

developing a HyperNet and/or a Post-Processing Net.

Help

The Help menu provides access to the Help information through the

standard Windows techniques.

PLOTTING LARGE FILES WITH HYPERPLOT

If a OMP-MODL Download file contains a channel with greater than 20,000 samples,

the plot must be broken into two or more pages for plotting. If a file of this size is

plotted, an information dialog box will display asking if the User wants to advance to

the next page before plotting.

When a page of data (beyond the first page) is selected for plotting, the X-axis will

display the time from the start of the file, however data will only be plotted in the

right half of the screen. Plotted data can then be expanded to full screen using the

conventional Zooming method.

INTEGRATING HYPERPLOTS INTO OTHER SOFTWARE

APPLICATIONS

Via Bitmap Files

Through the File/Save File as Bitmap menu choice (explained previously)

HyperPlots can be saved to a bitmap file format (*.BMP) which can then be

utilized in a multitude of other Windows applications.

From within other applications, menu commands are available that allow

User’s to specify a location and the bitmap file to be integrated. For

example, from within Microsoft’s Word for Windows, using the Insert Frame

and insert Picture commands results in a seamless integration of the plot

into a document. Other applications have similar procedures for integrating

plots.

HyperPlot bitmap files can also be annotated and/or edited further from

within graphic editing applications such as Windows Paintbrush.

Via the Windows Clipboard

For quick and simple integration of plots into other applications, the plot can

be captured to the Windows clipboard, then pasted into another document.

To perform this procedure, display the plot on the screen, then save the

screen to the clipboard by pressing <ALT> and <Print Screen>. Change to

the other application and utilize the Paste command to integrate it into the

document.

USING THE OMP-MODL

9-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9... HYPERPLOT™ GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY

9-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

The OMP-MODL in conjunction with a PC running HyperWare is capable of

operating in a real-time mode called HyperTrack or tracking. HyperTrack provides a

real-time graphic trending and/or scrolling numerical display on the connected PC

screen of values received from a serially connected OMP-MODL. Figure 10... -1

shows real-time tracking in the HyperTrack window. The HyperTrack display occurs

concurrently while the OMP-MODL is executing its Program Net and logging data.

Graphic trending and Scrolling can be run simultaneously and multiple windows of

each function can be open.

Figure 10... -1: Real-time tracking of data within the HyperTrack window

HyperTrack can operate via RS-232 or modem serial connections, allowing for the

real-time monitoring of actual Program Net values from a remotely located OMP-

MODL.

To utilize the HyperTrack feature within HyperWare, the following steps are

performed:

1. Develop and upload to the OMP-MODL a Program Net which

includes Probe Point icons at the Net nodes to be monitored.

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

2. From within HyperTrack, construct a real-time HyperTrack Net.

(Note that this is a different Net than the Program Netuploaded

into the OMP-MODL memory. The HyperTrack Net runs on the

PC)

3. Establish the serial connection between the PC and the OMP-

MODL

4. Enable real-time tracking

CONSTRUCTING A OMP-MODL PROGRAM NET FOR

HYPERTRACK

A OMP-MODL that is to be used in the real-time tracking mode must be

programmed with a Program Net that incorporates Probe Point icons. The Probe

Point icons are connected to nodes within the Program Net that the User may want

to monitor through HyperTrack. Not all nodes with Probe Point icons must be

displayed on the PC during HyperTrack, however any node to be monitored must

have a Probe Point icon.

Figure 10... -

2: Probe

Point icon

Probe Point icons can be given a Name via the conventional icon configuration

dialog box. This name is used as a column heading during real-time tracking (see

the Master Icon Reference in Appendix A).

Figure 10... -3 shows a simple two thermocouple Program Net that has Probe Point

icons to allow HyperTrack display of the two temperatures, Tinlet and Toutlet, and

the cooling fan status FanStat.

Figure 10... -3: Example Program Net with Probe Point

icons connected for tracking (built in HyperNet window)

Nodes within the Program Net to which Probe Point icons are connected can also be

displayed on the OMP-MODL front-panel LCD real-time. Refer to Chapter 2 for real-

time LCD display of Probe Point icons.

After completion of the Program Net, upload it to the OMP-MODL memory. Refer to

Chapter 7 for Program Net development and uploading procedures.

10-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

CONSTRUCTING A HYPERTRACK NET

During a real-time tracking session, the OMP-MODL transmits values of the Probe

Point icons to the PC via the serial link. These values are then processed through a

HyperTrack Net running on the PC (in the HyperTrack window) and displayed.

HyperTrack Nets provide a means to perform additional processing of values from

Probe Point icons before they are displayed. HyperTrack Nets can also provide

storage of Probe Point icon values to a file on the PC while the real-time data is

being received.

The HyperTrack Net is constructed much the same way as a Program Net is

developed within HyperNet. The main difference is that a Program Net running in a

OMP-MODL receives its data from various hardware channels such as

thermocouples whereas the HyperTrack Net receives its data from the Probe Point

icons contained in the Program Net in an Enabled OMP-MODL. Figure 10... -4

shows a completed HyperTrack Net.

Figure 10... -4: Example HyperTrack Net (developed within the HyperTrack

window)

Determining OMP-MODL Program Net Probes Information

Before a HyperTrack Net can be developed, the Probe Point icons contained

within the associated OMP-MODL Program Net must be known. This

information can be gained by downloading the Program Net from a serially

connected OMP-MODL or by opening the Program Net from disk (assuming

it was saved after development).

Receiving Probe Point Icons from a serially

connected OMP-MODL):

1. Establish a serial connection with the OMP-MODL to be

used during the HyperTrack session. At this time, the

OMP-MODL has already been programmed with a

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

Program Net that contains the desired Probe Point icons.

The OMP-MODL may be in either the Enabled or

Stopped mode.

2. From the HyperComm Window, click and drag the

Program Net icon on the OMP-MODL to the PC and

release it. The Program Net and Probe Point icon

information will be automatically downloaded to the PC

and a Probe Point icon will display overlaying the image

of the PC. NOTE: If the Probe Point icon does not

display on the PC, then the transferred Program Net

does not contain Probe Point icon(s) and this Program

Net can not be used for tracking. (In this case, develop a

new Program Net containing Probe Point icons and

upload it to the OMP-MODL.)

1. From within the HyperComm Window, click on the

HyperTrack button (or double click on the Probe Point

icon overlaying the PC) and the HyperTrack window will

appear with Probe Point icon(s) displayed on the left

edge of the workspace (Figure 10... -5). These icons

represent the Probe Point icons detected in the Program

Net that was just downloaded to the PC (and which is

Figure 10... -5: Probe Points detected in the currently loaded Net Program

currently programmed in the OMP-MODL’s memory).

2. Once this Probe Point icon information is displayed on

the workspace, it can be saved to a HyperTrack Net file

(the filename extension *.PRB will be appended) by

using the File/Save As drop-down menu selection. This

file can then be used as a starting point for development

of additional nets based on the same Program Net.

10-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

3. The OMP-MODL connection can then be disconnected

(eg to save long distance charges if connected via

modem) while the HyperTrack Net is developed.

Reading Probe Point icons from a Program Net on

disk:

If a copy of the Program Net that will be running in the OMP-MODL

during tracking is available on disk, this Program Net can be opened

from disk and the Probe Point icon information will be available for

HyperTrack Net development.

This method does not require establishing a serial link with the

OMP-MODL.

1. Switch to the HyperNet Window by clicking on the

HyperNet button.

2. Open the Program Net file

3. Switch to the HyperComm Window by clicking on the

HyperComm button, and a Probe Points icon should be

overlayed on the PC. (If the Probe Point icon is not

displayed, the Program Net selected does not contain

any Probe Point icons and a new Program Net should be

selected/developed.)

1. From within the HyperComm Window, click on the

HyperTrack button (or double click on the Probe Point

icon overlaying the PC) and the HyperTrack window will

appear with Probe Point icons displayed on the left edge

of the workspace. These icons represent the Probe Point

icons in the Program Net currently programmed in the

OMP-MODL’s memory.

Figure 10...

-6:

HyperTrack

button

2. Once this Probe Point icon information is displayed on

the workspace, it can be saved to a HyperTrack Net file

(the filename extension *.PRB will be appended) by

using the File/Save As drop-down menu selection. This

file can then be used as a starting point for development

of additional nets based on the same Program Net.

Note: The Program Net icon overlaying the PC in the

HyperComm Window represents the last Program Net

loaded from disk (in the HyperNet Window) or the last

Program Net downloaded from a serially connected

OMP-MODL. If the Program Net currently residing in the

PC contains Probe Point icons, then that icon will also

show overlaying the PC.

Building the HyperTrack Net

Icons

Three icons are available on the Icon Toolbar for use in construction

of the HyperTrack Net, a Math icon, a File icon, and the Real-Time

Scrolling Display icon.

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

MATH ICON

The Math icon provides algebraic processing of data as it passes

from input to output. In Figure 10... -3 above, the Math icon is

providing a differential temperature calculation and generating a

third data channel, Tdelta which is then displayed as well as

stored to file.

Figure 10... -

7: Math icon

FILE ICON

The File icon represents storage to file of all signals connected to

its inputs. Multiple inputs can be connected to the File icon and

through its configuration dialog box, the data can be stored in an

ASCII (*.TXT), OMP-MODL Download (*.HLD), or Excel

Spreadsheet (*.XLS) format.

Figure 10... -

8: File icon

Multiple File icons can be connected in a net for simultaneous

storage of different signals and/or multiple file formats.

REAL-TIME SCROLLING DISPLAY ICON

Signals connected to the Scrolling Display icon will be displayed

in a scrolling columnar format on the Workspace when tracking is

enabled. Up to 8 inputs can be connected to this icon. No

configuration dialog is available for this icon, double-clicking on it

opens the scrolling display window.

Figure 10... -

9: Real-time

Scroll icon

Multiple Scrolling Display icons can be connected in a net

allowing multiple HyperTrack windows to be displayed

simultaneously for greater channel capability.

REAL-TIME GRAPHIC TRENDING DISPLAY ICON REAL-TIME GRAPHIC

TRENDING DISPLAY

Signals connected to the Trending Display icon will be displayed

in a multi-trace horizontal line graph format within the Workspace

when tracking is enabled. Up to 8 inputs can be connected to

this icon. No configuration dialog is available for this icon,

double-clicking on it opens the scrolling display window.

Fig 10... -

10: Real-

time Trend

icon

Multiple Scrolling Display icons can be connected in a net

allowing multiple HyperTrack windows to be displayed

simultaneously for greater channel capability.

Connecting Icons

Icons are connected using the standard drag and drop connection

method used for construction of Program Nets.

Unconnected Probe Point icons will not display.

Other HyperTrack Net Development Options

As in the development of a Program Net from within HyperNet,

various tools such as Grid, Snap, and Print Net options are available

from the Menu Bar.

Saving the HyperTrack Net

Upon completion of the Net, it can be saved for later use with the menu

selection File/Save Net As or with the Save Net button.

10-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

Saved HyperTrack Nets should only be used for real-time tracking with

OMP-MODLs configured with Program Nets that contain matching Probe

Point icons. If mismatched nets are used, channels may be incorrectly titled

and displayed in incorrect sequence.

For example: A HyperTrack Net is developed and saved

for use with a OMP-MODL Program Net that includes 3

Probe Point icons labeled A, B, and C. Accidently, the

HyperTrack Net is used with a OMP-MODL running a

Program Net that contains only 2 Probe Point icons

labeled X and Y. The resulting HyperTrack Net data

display will result in two channels labeled A (displaying X

data) and B (displaying Y data) and a third channel

labeled C that just displays 0.

To avoid this confusion, check the correlation between

the HyperTrack Net and the OMP-MODL Program Net

before Tracking.

STARTING A HYPERTRACK SESSION

Initiation of a HyperTrack session is handled from within the HyperTrack window.

Before starting a session, the following conditions must be met:

The OMP-MODL must be programmed with a Program Net

including Probe Point icons

A serial connection between the OMP-MODL and the PC must

be established

A compatible HyperTrack Net must be loaded and displayed on

the HyperTrack window of HyperWare

All File icons included within the HyperTrack Net must have

filenames provided

The OMP-MODL must be Enabled

To start tracking, click on the Green Start button. Clicking on this button commands

the connected OMP-MODL to start sending out the Probe Point icon values, which

are in turn processed by the HyperTrack Net on the PC. The Scrolling Display

window(s) will automatically open and begin displaying data. Any Destination File

icons will create the specified filenames and begin recording to that file.

Figure 10... -

11: Start

Tracking

button

HyperTrack Scrolling Display Window

During real-time tracking, data from the signals connected to the Scrolling

Display icon is displayed in a columnar format in the pop-up Scrolling

Display window.

Channel Display Order

The order of display (left to right) of inputs is set by the order of

connection of signals to the Scrolling Display icon. The top

connection is displayed on the left and the bottom connection is

displayed on the right.

Up to 8 channels can be displayed in the Scrolling Display window.

Utilize the slide bar at the bottom of the window to view channels

that are out of the window to the left or right.

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

Data Buffer

As new data is collected, older data will be scrolled down one line.

Older data is still accessable after it has scrolled out of the window

by clicking on the scroll bar buttons on the right side of the window.

HyperTrack Trending Display Window

During real-time tracking, data from the signals connected to the Trending

Display icon is displayed in a multi-pen horizontal format in the pop-up

Trending Display window. Time is plotted horizontally and input data

amplitude is plotted vertically on a single axis.

As time progresses, track data is buffered, scrolls off the left edge of the

window, and is eventually deleted from the buffer (FIFO) as a function of the

User defined settings explained below.

NOTE:

In cases where the OMP-MODL is set for very fast

sampling rates , the Trending function will put heavy

video demands on the connected PC and PC’s video

card. In some cases, the PC will be unable to handle

the high speed incoming data stream and the

Trending display will not perform or will update very

slowly. If this is the case, decrease the OMP-MODL

sampling rate or run HyperWare and the Trending

function on a faster PC platform.

10-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

Trending Configuration Dialog

By double-clicking anywhere on the Trending Display Window, a

Configuration Dialog is displayed (Figure 10... -12). This dialog allows for

various User settings for the data display.

Figure 10... -12: Real Time Trending Configuration dialog

NOTE: After changing any of the following settings,

the Tracking session must be Stopped (click on the

Stop Sign Button) and restarted (Green Flag).

Changing any of the following settings during a

Tracking session will result in a refresh of the

display and clearing of buffered data.

Time Display Formats

Time is displayed on the horizontal axis and can be set for either

Elapsed time since the start of the Track session (the default), or

Absolute, in which the absolute calendar date and time is displayed.

To select Absolute, click on the Display Absolute Date/Time check-

box.

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

Channel Ranges

The data channels are scaled and plotted per a single amplitude

axis on the left edge of the plot. Upon start of a Trend Tracking

session, the range for all channels defaults to +/-1000.

A Min. and Max. value for each channel can be set by editing the

appropriate text boxes. If all of the channels have the same

Min/Max values, then the vertical axis will reflect this range. For

example if 4 channels of room temperature are being logged, all of

the 4 channels could be set for 50 to 70 and the vertical axis would

reflect this approximate range.

If the Channels have different Min/Max settings, the vertical axis will

default to display as 0 to 100% of the range specified.

Data Buffer

As data is received by the Trending icon, it is buffered temporarily in

PC memory. Eventually, the buffer fills and the oldest data is

deleted as new data is added (FIFO). The amount of data that is

buffered in the PC is set in the Trending Configuration dialog by

editing the Sample Buffer text box.

Plot Period

The amount of data that is displayed in the Trending Window is set

by editing the Plot Period setting in the Configuration Dialog. Older

data (that has not rolled out of the buffer... see above) is still

accessible after it has scrolled out of the window by clicking on the

scroll bar buttons on the lower edge of the window.

NOTE: Stopping, then restarting a HyperTrack

session using a net containing File icons will cause

the file information to be overwritten with new data.

To save data from consecutive HyperTrack sessions,

rename any connected File icon before restarting the

HyperTrack session.

PAUSING A HYPERTRACK SESSION

By clicking on the Pause button on the toolbar, a HyperTrack session can be

temporarily stopped if the data being recieved is of no concern. Any connected

Destination File icons will stop writing to their files, but will not close.

Figure 10... -

13: Pause

button

RESUMING AFTER PAUSE

When in Pause mode, the Pause button will change into a Resume button. Clicking

this button will resume normal Tracking operation and resume writing to any

Destination File icons.

Figure 10... -

14: Resume

button

10-10

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

STOPPING A HYPERTRACK SESSION

To stop a real-time tracking session, click on the Stop button. Stopping a tracking

session does not stop execution of the Program Net within the OMP-MODL, it

merely commands the OMP-MODL to stop sending Probe Point values to the PC.

When a HyperTrack session is stopped, the files associated with any connected File

icons are closed and the update of data to the Scrolling Display window stops.

Figure 10... -

15: Stop

Tracking

button

NOTE: Stopping, then restarting a HyperTrack

session using a net containing File icons will cause

the file information to be overwritten with new data.

To save data from consecutive HyperTrack sessions,

rename any connected File icon before restarting the

HyperTrack session.

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

NOTES:

10-12

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10... HYPERTRACK™ REAL-TIME DATA DISPLAY

USING THE OMP-MODL

10-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDICES

11... APPENDICES

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11... APPENDICES

NOTES:

11-2

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

THERMOCOUPLE INPUT ICON:

FUNCTION:

Performs the thermocouple channel selection, amplification, cold junction compensation

and A-D conversion for a thermocouple hardware input from an MLIM-1 Interface Module.

The CJC reading is taken from the integral thermistor located by the terminal strip header

on the inside of the MLAD-1.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update Clock:

Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or Hi.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or connected

and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are degrees C or F,

selectable from the icon configuration dialog box.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Use This Channel for Voltage: Both the Thermocouple Icon and the VDC-2V

Icon utilize the same Interface Module hardware Configuration Switch

setting. Because of this capability, a Thermocouple Icon can be changed

into a VDC-LO Icon by simply clicking on the CHANGE button.

Thermocouple Type:

channel.

Specify the type of thermocouple to be connected to this

Units:

Specifies the temperature scale units that will be output from this icon.

Celcius and Fahrenheit are directly supported, however, conversion to other

units can be performed within a Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto

this icon’s output.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz filtering technique.

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during thermocouple channel

reading. First order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be

picked up by sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which

a channel can be sampled. See Appendix for discussion on use of

filtering.

11-4

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

CJC (COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION) INPUT ICON:

FUNCTION:

Performs the Cold Junction Compensation (CJC) channel selection, amplification, and

A-D conversion for a thermistor hardware input from a sensor mounted by the terminal

strip header on the inside of the MLAD-1.).

Alternatively, the CJC icon can be used to take a resistance reading or measure the

temperature of an external thermistor (10Kohm at 25C, Fenwall curve 16 or equivalent).

A wire jumper on the terminal strip can be removed and external wiring added if this

optional use is desired. Due to the optimization of the CJC circuit for temperature

sensing, the resistance measurement capability of this circuit does not provide consistent

linearity over the full range. The normal resistance measuring range for a thermistor is

200 ohms to 70,000 ohms.

NOTE: If Thermocouple icons are used in the Program Net, the external sensing function

described above must not be used as the temperature of the terminal strip is critical in the

calculation of thermocouple temperatures.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update Clock: Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or Hi.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or connected

and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are degrees C or F, or

ohms, selectable from the icon configuration dialog box..

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Units:

Specifies the temperature scale units that will be output from this icon.

Celcius, Fahrenheit, and Ohms are directly supported.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

SUPPLY VOLTAGE (VBATT) INPUT ICON (SYSTEM BASE)

FUNCTION:

Used to take readings of the OMP-MODL internal Supply Voltage. If internal batteries are

installed in the OMP-MODL and an external power supply is also connected, the output

value will be the higher of the two.

The Supply Voltage output from this icon is representative of the voltage measured at an

internal node on the power supply circuitry. Displayed battery voltage is the voltage of the

internal batteries . External supply voltage will be approximately 2 volts higher than

indicated. If the Input Range Jumper (see MLCPU-1 section) is set to HI, the External

supply voltage will be approximately 3.5 volts higher than indicated.

INPUTS:

Hardware:

No signal input shown on icon for Program Net connections. Input

signal comes from system voltage measurement.

Update Clock:

Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or HI.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are Volts

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under

the icon within the Program Net.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-6

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

DC-LO; +/- 2VDC FULL SCALE VOLTAGE INPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

Performs the analog channel selection, amplification, and A-D conversion for a DC

voltage input within the range of +/-2V from an MLIM-1 Interface Module.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update Clock: Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or Hi.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or connected

and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are Volts.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Change this channel to a thermocouple input: Both the Thermocouple Icon

and the DC-LO Icon utilize the same Interface Module hardware

Configuration Switch setting. Because of this capability, a DC-LO Icon can

be changed into a Thermocouple Icon by simply clicking on the CHANGE

button.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. Select the range so

that anticipated input signal fluctuations will not exceed this Full Scale

range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an over-range value will be

logged.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz filtering technique.

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by

sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel

can be sampled. See Appendix for discussion on use of filtering.

11-8

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

DC-MED; +/- 10 VDC FULL SCALE VOLTAGE INPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

Performs the analog channel selection, amplification, and A-D conversion for a DC

voltage input within the range of +/-10VDC from an MLIM-1 Interface Module.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update Clock:

Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or Hi.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or connected

and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are Volts.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. Select the range so

that anticipated input signal fluctuations will not exceed this Full Scale

range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an over-range value will be

logged.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz filtering technique.

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by

sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel

can be sampled. See Appendix for discussion on use of filtering.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

DC-HI; +/- 30 VDC FULL SCALE VOLTAGE INPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

Performs the analog channel selection, amplification, and A-D conversion for a DC

voltage input within the range of +/-30VDC from an MLIM-1 Interface Module.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update Clock:

Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or Hi.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or connected

and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are Volts.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. Select the range so

that anticipated input signal fluctuations will not exceed this Full Scale

range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an over-range value will be

logged.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz filtering technique.

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by

sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel

can be sampled. See Appendix for discussion on use of filtering.

11-10

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

MA-LO; +/- 20 MADC FULL SCALE CURRENT INPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

Performs the analog channel selection, amplification, and A-D conversion for a DC

current input within the range of +/-20mADC from an MLIM-1 Interface Module.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update Clock:

Output is updated with new reading upon each Update Clock pulse

when Enable input is unconnected or Hi.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or connected

and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are mA.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. Select the range so

that anticipated input signal fluctuations will not exceed this Full Scale

range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an over-range value will be

logged.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz filtering technique.

Filtering:

First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by sensor wiring with

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel can be sampled. See Appendix

for discussion on use of filtering.

11-12

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

RTD INPUT ICON (MLIM-4)

FUNCTION:

RTD, resistance, and thermistor signal inputs can all be handled with the MLIM-4. With

the MLIM-4 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons become available

for use in Program Nets.

As an RTD input, the icon samples the resistance of the connected RTD, converts it to

temperature and passes it along to the next icon. 2, 3, and 4-wire configurations are all

supported.

This channel/icon can be changed to a thermistor or resistance input channel by

selecting the Change button.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on icon for Program Net connections.

Update:

The input is sampled every time an Update command is received on the

Update input and the Enable terminal is True.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are degrees C or F,

selectable from the icon configuration dialog box.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to H) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Input Type: Specifies the wiring configuration to be used.

2-Wire is typically used for measurements of higher resistance values or

with short lead wire runs where the resistance of the lead wires induces

negligible error. With 2-wire configuration, all four input channels can be

used.

3 and 4-Wire configurations are used where the lead wires to the element

are longer and/or premium measurement accuracy is required. Both 3 and

4-wire configurations compensate for the lead wire resistance. 3-wire

provides nearly the same performance as 4-wire using only 3 wires instead

of 4.

If 3 or 4-wire configuration is selected, the input requires two input

channels. From within the A and C channel icons, selecting 3 or 4-wire will

result in a displayed message that a second channel will be deleted (B or

D).

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. For optimum resolution,

choose the narrowest range that will meet the signal fluctuation without

exceeding the Full Scale Range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an

over-range value will be logged.

Input Res: Specify the RTD 0’C resistance value. Both 100 and 1000 ohm devices are

supported.

Curve (alpha):

Specify the alpha coefficient for your type of RTD. This coefficient

is used in the conversion equation of resistance to temperature. If

unknown, contact the RTD supplier for input. European (most common) =

0.00385 and American = 0.00392.

Units:

Select Degrees C or F

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by

sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel

can be sampled. See the OMP-MODL User’s Manual Appendix for

discussion on use of filtering.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

the OMP-MODL User’s Manual Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz

filtering technique.

Change:

Click on CHANGE to switch the icon / dialog box between thermistor,

resistance, or RTD type input.

11-14

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

THERMISTOR INPUT ICON (MLIM-4)

FUNCTION:

RTD, resistance, and thermistor signal inputs can all be handled with the MLIM-4. With

the MLIM-4 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons become available

for use in Program Nets.

As a thermistor input, the icon samples the resistance of the connected thermistor,

converts it to temperature and passes it along to the next icon. As thermistors have high

ohm/C ratios, lead wire error is negligible and only the 2-wire configuration is supported.

This channel/icon can be changed to an RTD or resistance input channel by selecting the

Change button.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on icon for Program Net connections.

Update:

The input is sampled every time an Update command is received on the

Update input and the Enable terminal is True.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are degrees C or F,

selectable from the icon configuration dialog box.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to H) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. For optimum resolution,

choose the narrowest range that will meet the signal fluctuation without

exceeding the Full Scale Range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an

over-range value will be logged.

Units:

Select Degrees C or F

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by

sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel

can be sampled. See the OMP-MODL User’s Manual Appendix for

discussion on use of filtering.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

the OMP-MODL User’s Manual Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz

filtering technique.

Change:

Click on CHANGE to switch the icon / dialog box between thermistor,

resistance, or RTD type input.

11-16

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

RESISTANCE INPUT ICON (MLIM-4)

FUNCTION:

RTD, resistance, and thermistor signal inputs can all be handled with the MLIM-4. With

the MLIM-4 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons become available

for use in Program Nets.

As a Resistance input, the icon samples the resistance of the connected input and

passes it along to the next icon. 2, 3, and 4-wire configurations are all supported.

This channel/icon can be changed to a thermistor or RTD input channel by selecting the

Change button.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on icon for Program Net connections.

Update:

The input is sampled every time an Update command is received on the

Update input and the Enable terminal is True.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal. The Units of the output are ohms.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to H) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Input Type: Specifies the wiring configuration to be used.

2-Wire is typically used for measurements of higher resistance values or

with short lead wire runs where the resistance of the lead wires induces

negligible error. With 2-wire configuration, all four input channels can be

used.

3 and 4-Wire configurations are used where the lead wires to the element

are longer and/or premium measurement accuracy is required. Both 3 and

4-wire configurations compensate for the lead wire resistance. 3-wire

provides nearly the same performance as 4-wire using only 3 wires instead

of 4.

If 3 or 4-wire configuration is selected, the input requires two input

channels. From within the A and C channel icons, selecting 3 or 4-wire will

result in a displayed message that a second channel will be deleted (B or

D).

Range:

Specify the input range to be used for this channel. For optimum resolution,

choose the narrowest range that will meet the signal fluctuation without

exceeding the Full Scale Range. If the input exceeds the selected range, an

over-range value will be logged.

For reference, the excitation currents used on the various ranges are

documented. In cases where two identical ranges are provided , use the

range with the higher current... unless self-heating or other ancillary effects

are of concern.

Filtering: First order noise filtering can be enabled during channel reading. First

order filtering reduces high frequency noise that may be picked up by

sensor wiring with the cost that it slows down the rate at which a channel

can be sampled. See the OMP-MODL User’s Manual Appendix for

discussion on use of filtering.

AC Noise Reject: Enables software filtering of 50Hz or 60Hz noise on inputs. See

the OMP-MODL User’s Manual Appendix for an explanation of the 50/60 Hz

filtering technique.

Change:

Click on CHANGE to switch the icon / dialog box between thermistor,

resistance, or RTD type input.

11-18

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

EVENT INPUT ICON (GPDI)

FUNCTION:

The GPDI (General Purpose Digital Input) is a hardware digital input for Event and

Counter applications. It is incorporated into every OMP-MODL System Base.

As an EVENT input, it samples the input signal state (High or Low) per the sampling rate

set on the Update input. It updates its output only when the input changes state.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update:

The input is sampled every time an Update command is received on the

Update input. If the input state has changed since the last Update

command was received, the Output is updated with the new state. The

absolute time resolution of the state change is determined by the frequency

of the Update signal. For example, if an Update command is received

every second, the state change will be recorded with one second

resolution.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type signal

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Event / Counter

Select EVENT for the Event function.

Debounce: Enables a hardware filter circuit that prevents short duration transitions

from passing into the icon. Debounce can be used to filter out contact

bounce from mechanical switches. The GPDI Debounce has a time

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

constant of approximately 50mS. Note that the use of Debounce will delay

the actual input to output time by 50 to 200 mS.

FYI: Contact bounce is a phenomenon that

occurs when a mechanical switch opens or

closes. During switching, the physical electrical

contacts inside the switch bounce against each

other a number of times before they settle to

their final state.

Depending on the duty cycle of the contact

bounce, the OMP-MODL may count these

bounces as events or transitions (count mode)

resulting in technically accurate but undesired

data. By enabling the debounce function, typical

short duration contact bounce will be filtered out.

Output True when input is LOW / HIGH:

Specify what the state of the input

signal is for the icon Output to be True. For example, if a switch is

connected to the Event icon input, the User can then specify which state the

switch should be in for a TRUE Output from the Event icon. Output True

when input is LOW will result in an icon Output that is TRUE when the

switch is closed. Output True when input is TRUE will result in an icon

Output that is True when the switch is open.

11-20

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

COUNTER INPUT ICON (GPDI)

FUNCTION:

The GPDI (General Purpose Digital Input) is a hardware digital input for Event and

Counter applications and is incorporated into every OMP-MODL System Base.

As a COUNTER input, it accumulates counts from a User connected hardware signal

input, then outputs the count when it receives an Update command. When the count is

output, the counter is automatically set back to 0 and counting resumes.

The GPDI Counter (in contrast to the MLIM-2 Counter) is very fast and can count pulses

received at input rates up to 10 KHZ. However, when using the GPDI Counter with high

speed inputs, it is imperative that the Counter receive an Update command before it

counts up to 65,535 or a counter roll-over condition will occur and count data will be lost.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update:

The accumulated count is output every time an Update command is

received on the Update input. To preclude the loss of data, this Update

command should be received before the icon counts to 65,535 or the

counter will roll-over to 0 and continue counting, resulting in lost counts.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal (ie Count totals)

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Event / Counter

Select COUNTER for the Counter function.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Debounce: Enables a hardware filter circuit that prevents short duration transitions

from passing into the icon. Debounce can be used to filter out contact

bounce from mechanical switches. The GPDI Debounce has a time

constant of approximately 50mS. Debounce should not be used when

counting signals of frequency higher than 10Hz or signals with On or Off

durations shorter than approximately 100mS.

FYI: Contact bounce is a phenomenon that

occurs when a mechanical switch opens or

closes. During switching, the physical electrical

contacts inside the switch bounce against each

other a number of times before they settle to

their final state.

Depending on the duty cycle of the contact

bounce, the OMP-MODL may count these

bounces as events or transitions (count mode)

resulting in technically accurate but undesired

data. By enabling the debounce function, typical

short duration contact bounce will be filtered out.

Count Rising / Falling Edges:

The GPDI increments its accumulated count

when its input changes state from hi to lo or lo to hi. The User can specify

which transition (edge) is to be counted Rising (lo to hi) or Falling (hi to lo).

For example if a switch is connected to the input, the User can specify that

the count increment when the switch closes (Falling Edge) or when it opens

(Rising Edge).

11-22

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

EVENT INPUT ICON (DIGITAL I/O WITH MLIM-2)

FUNCTION:

An Event / Counter / Frequency input and Digital output functions are all provided with the

MLIM-2. Four channels can be configured on an individual basis as Frequency, Event, or

Counter type Inputs and four separate channels are available for Digital Output. With the

MLIM-2 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons become available for

use in Program Nets.

As an EVENT input, the icon samples the state of the User connected hardware input

signal (HI or LO) each time an Update command is received. The icon output state is

updated when the input state changes.

The same dialog is used to configure the channel for Event, Frequency, and Counter

functions.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on icon for Program Net connections.

Update:

The input is sampled every time an Update command is received on the

Update input. If the input state has changed since the last Update

command was received, the Output is updated with the new state. The

absolute time resolution of the state change is determined by the frequency

of the Update command. For example, if an Update command is received

every second, the state change will be recorded with one second

resolution.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type signal

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon. Conversion to other units can be performed within a

Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto this icon’s output.

Event / Counter / Frequency

Select EVENT for the Event function.

Debounce: Enables a hardware filter circuit that prevents short duration transitions

from passing into the icon. Debounce can be used to filter out contact

bounce from mechanical switches. The MLIM-2 Debounce has a time

constant of approximately 50mS. Note that the use of Debounce will delay

the actual input to output transition time by 50 to 200 mS.

FYI: Contact bounce is a phenomenon that

occurs when a mechanical switch opens or

closes. During switching, the physical electrical

contacts inside the switch bounce against each

other a number of times before they settle to

their final state.

Depending on the duty cycle of the contact

bounce, the OMP-MODL may count these

bounces as events or transitions (count mode)

resulting in technically accurate but undesired

data. By enabling the debounce function, typical

short duration contact bounce will be filtered out.

Output TRUE when Input is HIGH / LOW: Allows logical reversal of the Output with

respect to the input state.

11-24

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

COUNTER INPUT ICON (DIGITAL I/O WITH MLIM-2)

FUNCTION:

Event / Counter / Frequency input and Digital output functions are all provided with the

MLIM-2. With the MLIM-2 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons

become available for use in Program Nets.

The same dialog is used to configure the four input channels for Event, Frequency, and

Counter functions.

As a COUNTER input, the MLIM-2 channel accumulates counts from a User connected

hardware signal input, then outputs the count to the net when it receives an Update

command. When the count is output, the counter is automatically set back to 0 and

counting resumes.

The MLIM-2 Counter can count pulses received at input rates up to apx 20 Khz. However,

at higher frequencies, the net must be configured to read the counter before it overflows

or the counter will overflow and return to 0 and continue incrementing.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections. The MLIM-2

Counter function increments its count on received rising or falling edges of

the input signal.

Update:

The accumulated count is output every time an Update command is

received on the Update input. To preclude the loss of data, this Update

command (from a connected Sample Rate Clock ) should be received

before the icon counts to 16,777,216 or the counter will roll-over to 0 and

continue counting, resulting in lost counts.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal (ie Count totals)

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon. Conversion to other units can be performed within a

Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto this icon’s output.

Event / Counter / Frequency

Select COUNTER for the Counter function.

Debounce: Enables a hardware filter circuit that prevents short duration transitions

from passing into the icon. Debounce can be used to filter out contact

bounce from mechanical switches. The MLIM-2 Debounce has a time

constant of approximately 50mS. Note that the use of Debounce will delay

the actual input to output transition time by 50 to 200 mS.

FYI: Contact bounce is a phenomenon that

occurs when a mechanical switch opens or

closes. During switching, the physical electrical

contacts inside the switch bounce against each

other a number of times before they settle to

their final state.

Depending on the duty cycle of the contact

bounce, the OMP-MODL may count these

bounces as events or transitions (count mode)

resulting in technically accurate but undesired

data. By enabling the debounce function, typical

short duration contact bounce will be filtered out.

Count Rising / Falling edges: Specify which edge of the input signal is to be used to

increment the counter (eg when a device being monitored turns ON or

OFF).

11-26

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

FREQUENCY INPUT ICON (DIGITAL I/O WITH MLIM-2)

FUNCTION:

Event / Counter / Frequency input and Digital output functions are all provided with the

MLIM-2. With the MLIM-2 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons

become available for use in Program Nets.

The same dialog is used to configure the channel for Event, Frequency, and Counter

functions.

As a FREQUENCY input, the MLIM-2 channel samples the incoming waveform and

outputs the measured frequency to the net.

Calculation of the input signal frequency requires longer for lower frequencies. Due to

this effect, the speed of execution of a Program Net may be reduced when reading low

frequency inputs. (eg 10Hz inputs will require approximately 100mS to read, whereas a

100Hz input will require only 10mS)

NOTE: Due to the advanced signal processing utilized in the frequency mode,

unbalanced duty-cycle inputs are measured with the same accuracy as balanced duty-

cycle inputs.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on Net for Program Net connections.

Update:

The measured frequency is output every time an Update command is

received on the Update input.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type signal, Frequency in Hz.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon. Conversion to other units can be performed within a

Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto this icon’s output.

Event / Counter / Frequency

Select FREQUENCY for the Frequency function.

11-28

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

EVENT INPUT ICON (DIGITAL I/O WITH MLIM-8)

FUNCTION:

Event input and Digital output functions are all provided with the MLIM-8. With the MLIM-

8 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons become available for use in

Program Nets.

As an EVENT input, the icon samples the state of the User connected hardware input

signal (HI or LO) each time an Update command is received. The icon output state is

updated when the input state changes.

This channel/icon can be changed to a Digital Output channel by selecting the Change

this channel to an Output button.

INPUTS:

Hardware: No signal input shown on icon for Program Net connections.

Update:

The input is sampled every time an Update command is received on the

Update input. If the input state has changed since the last Update

command was received, the Output is updated with the new state. The

absolute time resolution of the state change is determined by the frequency

of the Update command. For example, if an Update command is received

every second, the state change will be recorded with one second

resolution.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and the Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type signal

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to H) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon. Conversion to other units can be performed within a

Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto this icon’s output.

Debounce: Enables a hardware filter circuit that prevents short duration transitions

from passing into the icon. Debounce can be used to filter out contact

bounce from mechanical switches. The MLIM-8 Debounce has a time

constant of approximately 50mS. Note that the use of Debounce will delay

the actual input to output transition time by 50 to 100 mS.

FYI: Contact bounce is a phenomenon that

occurs when a mechanical switch opens or

closes. During switching, the physical electrical

contacts inside the switch bounce against each

other a number of times before they settle to

their final state.

Depending on the duty cycle of the contact

bounce, the OMP-MODL may count these

bounces as events resulting in technically

accurate but undesired data. By enabling the

debounce function, typical short duration contact

bounce will be filtered out.

Change This Channel to an Output: Not applicable when using this channel as an

Event input. To change this channel to an Output, click on the Change

button.

11-30

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

DIGITAL OUTPUT ICON (MLIM-8)

FUNCTION:

Eight channels of Digital output or Event input are all provided with the MLIM-8. With

the MLIM-8 installed in a OMP-MODL, these respective function icons become available

for use in Program Nets. (Click on the CHANGE button within the Event dialog to switch

the channel’s icon function to a Digital Output).

The Digital Output icons provide software access to these digital outputs.

This channel/icon can be changed from a Digital Output to an Event Input channel by

clicking on the CHANGE button.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. True input turns hardware output ON. False input

turns output OFF. Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the Digital

Output icon to latch the Output True upon receipt of a momentary True

input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Program Net connections.

Hardware output only. No output terminal shown on icon for

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Use this channel for Input: Select CHANGE to switch this icon into an Event type

Input icon.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

DIGITAL ALARM OUTPUT ICON (SYSTEM BASE)

FUNCTION:

A Digital Alarm (TTL) output is provided as an integral part of the OMP-MODL System

Base. The Digital Alarm icon provides software access to this alarm output.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. True input turns Alarm ON. LOW input turns Alarm

OFF. Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the icon to latch the Alarm

ON with a momentary True input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output only. No output terminal shown on icon for

Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

11-32

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

RELAY ALARM OUTPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

Two Relay Alarm outputs are provided as an integral part of the OMP-MODL System

Base. The Relay Alarm icons provide software access to these alarm outputs.

INPUTS:

Input Signal:

Logic type. True input turns Alarm ON. False input turns Alarm

OFF. Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the icon to latch the Alarm

ON with a momentary True input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output only. No output terminal shown on icon for

Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

+5 VOLT OUTPUT ICON (SYSTEM BASE)

FUNCTION:

A regulated 5Vdc, 125mA current limited output is provided as an integral part of the

OMP-MODL System Base. The + 5 Volt icon provides software access to this alarm

output.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. True input turns Output ON. LOW input turns Output

OFF. Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the icon to latch the Output

ON upon receipt of a momentary True input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output only. No output terminal shown on icon for

Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

11-34

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

GREEN LED STATUS OUTPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

A Green LED (light emitting diode) is provided as an integral part of the OMP-MODL

System Base and displays on the front panel of the OMP-MODL. The Green LED icon

provides software access to this Status output.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. True input turns LED ON. False input turns LED OFF.

Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the icon to latch the LED ON with

a momentary True input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output (LED) only. No output terminal shown on icon for

Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Blinking: If the Blinking check box is checked, the LED will blink at a rate of 1 second

ON, 1 second OFF when the input is True. If not checked, the LED will be

ON continuously when the input is True.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

LCD MESSAGE OUTPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

User programmed messages can be displayed on the LCD (liquid crystal display) on the

front panel of the OMP-MODL System Base. The LCD Message icon provides for User

entry of a two-line message for display when the icon input is TRUE.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. True input turns message ON. False input turns

message display OFF. Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the LCD

Message icon to latch the message ON upon receipt of a momentary True

input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output (to LCD display) only. No output terminal shown

on icon for Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

First / Second Line Output: Two text boxes are provided for User entry of text to be

displayed on the LCD when the Input is TRUE. Up to 16 characters can be

entered on each line.

APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS:

When the LCD icon is activated (ie its input is TRUE), the programmed message is

displayed on the OMP-MODL LCD. If a second (different) message is activated the

second message will be displayed on the LCD and the first message will be maintained

on a queue of active messages. This queue of messages can be reviewed via the OMP-

MODL front panel Next / Select buttons menu Display Status Messages or via a Status

Query from within the HyperComm Window.

11-36

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

DIGITAL OUTPUT ICON (MLIM-2)

FUNCTION:

Four channels of Digital output are provided (along with 4 channels of Event / Counter/

and Frequency input) with the MLIM-2. With the MLIM-2 installed in a OMP-MODL, these

respective function icons become available for use in Program Nets.

The Digital Output icons provide software access to these digital outputs.

Refer to the Frequency, Counter and/or Event applications of the MLIM-2 for further

information on those functions.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. True input turns hardware output ON. False input

turns output OFF. Optionally, use the Latch icon in front of the Digital

Output icon to latch the Output True upon receipt of a momentary True

input.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Program Net connections.

Hardware output only. No output terminal shown on icon for

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net. If no name is User provided, the Backplane

Port (1 to 6) and Channel (A to D) where the actual Interface Module

channel is installed will be used for the name.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

PAGER CALL-OUT ICON

FUNCTION:

In OMP-MODLs equipped with a telephone modem option, the Pager Call-Out icon can

be used to dial a pager phone number, wait a User defined period of time (for the Paging

service tone), then transmit a User assigned code number. This code number can be

User assigned to represent a site and/or particular warning or status indication.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type. A FALSE to TRUE transition on the icon input initiates

the Pager call. The Page will complete even if the input signal returns

LOW.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

icon for Program Net connections.

Hardware output to installed modem. No output terminal shown on

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the name for the channel. This name will show directly under the

icon within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Pager Phone Number: Enter the telephone number to dial to gain access to the pager;

optionally followed by a number of commas (each which represents a 2

second delay) followed by the code number to be sent to the pager display.

For example: (619) 555-1212,,,,,9999 entered in this text box will result in:

1. When the Pager icon is activated, the OMP-MODL will dial the

phone number (619)555-1212. Parenthesis and hyphens are

ignored.

2. Wait for a 10 second delay (5 commas @ 2 seconds each)

11-38

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

3. The code number 9999 will be sent to the pager

4. The OMP-MODL modem will disconnect.

The commas are entered to insert a delay between the dialing of the pager

and the sending of the code. The delay time should be determined by the

User to meet the subscribed pager system timing requirements. This delay

can be determined empirically by calling the pager with a telephone and

manually timing the delay between the last number dial and the tone

indicating when a pager code should be entered. To allow for variations in

this delay time, a few extra seconds (one or two commas) can be added to

insure that the tone is received before the pager code is sent.

NOTE: The OMP-MODL does not detect a busy line or pager tone, it

merely executes the sequence of numbers and commas defined in this text

box. The Pager call-out function and associated timing should be tested

prior to field application.

Number of times to repeat page:

If a number other than 0 is entered in this box,

the Pager icon will will repeat the dialing sequence the specified number of

times.

Number of seconds between retries:

Enter the time to wait(in seconds)

before a repeat call is placed.

APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS:

Multiple Pager icons can be used in a Program Net, each connected to a different status

or warning function. Different pager phone numbers and/or codes can then be assigned

to indicate different status or warning conditons.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

PROBE POINT OUTPUT ICON

FUNCTION:

Probe Point Icons mark and provide access to nodes within a Program Net for:

1. The OMP-MODL front panel display while the Net is

executing. Values at the nodes can be accessed through the

Display Probe Icon Values LCD menu selection

2. Use during real-time HyperTrack sessions. Nodes marked

with Probe Point icons are accessible via the serial link.

The units displayed by a Probe Point icon is inherited from the output to which it is

connected. These units will appear on the LCD display as well as when the Probe Point is

used in a HyperTrack Net.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data or Logic type. The terminal will accept either signal type.

Update Clock:

None

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output (to LCD display and/or serial link ) only. No

output terminal shown on icon for Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:

Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under

the icon within the Program Net.

Input Name:

In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon

connected to this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the

other icon’s dialog.

Data Output Format: The User can specify the data format that will be used in Output

of the signal. In certain applications, additional processing speed may

be realized through a judicious selection of the format.

Default to Input Formats - the default format. The data will be output

using the same data format (Floating Point or Long Integer) as the Inputs

use. This selection can be used consistently with good speed performance

and no loss of precision.

11-40

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

Long Integer - The Input data will be converted to signed integer format,

then output. Signed Integer format includes only the digits to the left of the

decimal (XXXXX.)

The advantage of using Long Integer format is that this format will generally

consist of a fewer number of bytes, hence serial transmission of the data

for HyperTrack will be slightly faster. The number of bytes will dynamically

size, from 1 to 4 bytes, according to the magnitude of the Output.

The disadvantage of Long Integer format is that numerical precision will be

lost if incoming data is in floating point format. Precison will be lost in the

conversion to integer format (eg 26.3 becomes 26). If large numbers are

processed, this loss of precision may be negligible (eg 36785.2 becomes

36785).

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

MEMORY (OMP-MODL) ICON

FUNCTION:

The Memory icon represents data memory within the OMP-MODL System Base (either

internal or a PCMCIA memory card if installed).

The Units associated with the icon Output connected to the Memory icon Input will be

stored with the recorded values.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data or Logic type. The terminal will accept either signal type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

icon for Program Net connections.

Hardware output to memory only. No output terminal shown on

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:

Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under

the icon within the Program Net.

Input Name:

In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon

connected to this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the

other icon’s dialog.

Data Storage Format: The User can specify the data format that will be used to store

the data in memory. In certain applications, additional processing speed

and/or less memory per stored sample can be realized through a judicious

selection of the format.

Default to Input Formats - the default format. The data will be stored

using the same data format (Floating Point or Long Integer) as the Inputs

use. This selection can be used consistently with good speed performance

and no loss of precision.

Long Integer - The Input data will be converted to integer format, then the

data will be stored to memory in a signed Integer format. Signed Integer

format includes only the digits to the left of the decimal (XXXXX.)

11-42

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

The advantage of using Long Integer format is that this format will generally

utilize a fewer number of memory bytes for data storage. The number of

bytes will dynamically size, from 1 to 4 bytes, according to the magnitude

of the Output.

The disadvantage of Long Integer format is that numerical precision will be

lost if incoming data is in floating point format. Precison will be lost in the

conversion to integer format (eg 26.3 becomes 26). If large numbers are

processed, this loss of precision may be negligible (eg 36785.2 becomes

36785).

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

DESTINATION FILE ICON

FUNCTION:

The Destination File icon represents a file on disk within the PC. This icon can be used

as a destination file for data processed through a HyperTrack session and for file to file

conversions from within the Post-Processing window.

The Units associated with the Output terminal of the icon which is connected to the

Destination File icon Input will be stored with the recorded values.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data or Logic type. The terminal will accept either signal type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Hardware output to file on disk only. No output terminal shown on

icon for Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

The standard Windows File Save dialog box format is used during the configuration of the

Destination File icon. Conventional Windows commands are used to specify the

destination path and filename.

Save File as Type: Specify the file type (and extension) to be used. Three file types

are supported as follows:

*.HLD - This format is the standard OMP-MODL Download file format.

HyperPlot uses this file format.

*.TXT - An ASCII file format that can be viewed with any text type editor or

wordprocessor such as Notepad (for smaller files).

*.XLS - The Excel spreadsheet file format.

11-44

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

REAL-TIME SCROLLING DISPLAY ICON

FUNCTION:

The Real-Time Scrolling Display icon represents the HyperTrack Scrolling Display

Window in which real-time data values from a OMP-MODL are displayed. The Real-Time

Scrolling Display icon is used from within the HyperTrack Window during construction of

a HyperTrack Net.

The Units associated with the Output terminal of the icon which is connected to the Data

File icon Input will be stored with the recorded values.

Double clicking on the icon opens the HyperTrack Scrolling Display Window.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Up to eight Data or Logic type. The terminal will accept either

signal type. As connections are added to the icon, additional terminals

appear, up to a total of 8 channels.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

No output terminal shown on icon for Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

No Icon Configuration Dialog is available for this icon. Double clicking on the icon opens

the HyperTrack Scrolling Display Window.

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

No Configuration Options are available.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

REAL-TIME TRENDING DISPLAY ICON

FUNCTION:

The Real-Time Trending Display icon represents the HyperTrack Graphic Trending

Display Window in which real-time data values from a OMP-MODL are displayed. The

Real-Time Trending Display icon is used from within the HyperTrack Window during

construction of a HyperTrack Net.

Double clicking on the icon opens the HyperTrack Trending Display Window.

Refer to the chapter on HyperTrack for details on use of this icon.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Up to eight Data or Logic type. The terminal will accept either

signal type. As connections are added to the icon, additional terminals

appear, up to a total of 8 channels.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

No output terminal shown on icon for Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

Double clicking on the icon opens the HyperTrack Trending Display Window into which

the data is plotted. Double-clicking on the Display Window will result in a configuration

dialog for setting ranges on a channel by channel basis, time base format, display window

width and sample buffer depth.

11-46

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

NOTE: After changing any of the following settings,

the Tracking session must be Stopped (click on the

Stop Sign Button) and restarted (Green Flag).

Changing any of the following settings during a

Tracking session will result in a refresh of the

display and clearing of buffered data.

DIALOG CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Time Display Formats

Time is displayed on the horizontal axis and can be set for either Elapsed time since the

start of the Track session (the default), or Absolute, in which the absolute calendar date

and time is displayed. To select Absolute, click on the Display Absolute Date/Time

check-box.

Channel Ranges

The data channels are scaled and plotted per a single amplitude axis on the left edge of

the plot. Upon start of a Trend Tracking session, the range for all channels defaults to +/-

1000.

A Min. and Max. value for each channel can be set by editing the appropriate text boxes.

If all of the channels have the same Min/Max values, then the vertical axis will reflect this

range. For example if 4 channels of room temperature are being logged, all of the 4

channels could be set for 50 to 70 and the vertical axis would reflect this approximate

range.

If the Channels have different Min/Max settings, the vertical axis will default to display as

0 to 100% of the range specified.

Sample Buffer

As data is received by the Trending icon, it is buffered temporarily in PC memory.

Eventually, the buffer fills and the oldest data is deleted as new data is added (FIFO). The

amount of data that is buffered in the PC is set in the Trending Configuration dialog by

editing the Sample Buffer text box.

Plot Period

The amount of data that is displayed in the Trending Window is set by editing the Plot

Period setting in the Configuration Dialog. Older data (that has not rolled out of the

buffer... see above) is still accessible after it has scrolled out of the window by clicking on

the scroll bar buttons on the lower edge of the window.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

DELTA FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Delta icon provides a special data processing function that can be used in a Program

Net to drastically reduce the number of data samples required to profile an analog signal.

The Delta icon only passes data from input to output when the input signal differs from

the last passed sample by more than a User defined amount, ie the `delta’ value.

When logging data that has periods of relatively stable values mixed with occassional

dynamic fluctuations, the Delta icon can reduce the amount of data samples required to

profile the curve with a minimum of accuracy compromise.

The data plotted above demonstrates the reduction of data points that is possible with the

Delta icon. The Program Net shown below was developed with a Delta icon programmed

with a Delta value of 1 degree F. Temperature data was then collected over a few

seconds while the temperature sensor was warmed and then allowed to cool. As can be

seen, the curve profiles do reflect slight differences (1 degree F maximum deviation),

however the number of data samples used is radically reduced with the Delta icon data.

(Note that the curves are displayed with the same temperature scaling but are merely

offset for viewing.)

11-48

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data type.

Update Clock:

None

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Delta icon updates its output data when the

updated input has changed in magnitude by a User defined `delta’ amount

in comparison to the last passed sample.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Output data if input changes by more than: Enter the `delta’ value. For example if

the data is to be passed if it changes by more than +/-2 degrees then enter

the value of 2.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Force Output Every: If this box is checked, a value will output periodically regardless

of whether or not the delta value has been exceeded.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

AVERAGE FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

Averages data passing through the icon. The Average icon will accumulate a User

specified number of input samples, then calculate and output the average. The Average

icon can be used in either of two different modes: Conventional, or Sliding. These two

modes are described below.

Conventional:For example, if a User wants to take temperature readings every 5

minutes and calculate and store hourly averages, a Program Net as shown

could be used. The Thermocouple icon is set to sample every 5 minutes

per its attached Sample Rate Clock and the Average icon is configured to

average 12 readings (ie 12 readings x 5 minutes = 1 hour) then output.

Sliding: The sliding average can be used to smooth noisy signals. When configured as

a sliding average, every time the icon receives an updated input, a new

average is calculated and output. The average will be calculated by

dropping the oldest value, adding the new value then dividing by the

Number of Samples Per Average. The following graph shows two plots of

the same noisy input signal. The highly varying trace depicts the raw input

which was logged straight to memory. The second, smoother trace was fed

through a Sliding Average icon set for 10 samples. The smoothing effect is

apparent.

11-50

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data type.

Update Clock:

None

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Average icon updates its output after receiving and

averaging the User specified number of readings.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Conventional/Sliding: Select type of Averaging function to perform.

Number of Samples per Average: Specify the number of input readings to average

before outputting.

Output current Average upon disable: Check this box to force an output of the in-

process average calculation at any time that the icon is disabled. If this

box is not checked, upon receipt of a disable signal, the Average

calculation will be momentarily suspended until the icon is re-enabled and

no in-process value will be output.

For example, if an average is to be calculated over 10 samples but only 7

have been averaged and the icon is disabled, the 7 sample average will be

output and the Average calculation will be suspended until re-enabled.

Upon re-enable, the calculation will continue and after 3 more samples are

received, the 10 sample average will be output (unless the following check

box is checked)

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Clear Sample Count and Average upon Enable: Check this box to force a reset of

the Average calculation as well as the Sample count used used for the

calculation upon receipt of an Enable signal.

If this box is not checked, upon receipt of an Enable signal, the Average

calculation will proceed from its suspended state (that it entered when it

was disabled).

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-52

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

MINIMUM FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

Detects the minimum data value passing through the icon. The Minimum icon will

accumulate a User specified number of input samples, then calculate and output the

minimum value received.

For example, if a User wants to take temperature readings every 5 minutes and calculate

and store hourly minimums, a Program Net as shown could be used. The Thermocouple

icon is set to sample every 5 minutes per its attached Sample Rate Clock and the

Minimum icon is configured to analyze 12 readings (ie 12 readings x 5 minutes = 1 hour)

then output the minimum.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Minimum icon updates its output with the

minimum value after receiving and analyzing the User specified number of

readings.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Output after __ Samples: Specify the number of input readings to analyze before

outputting the minimum value in the group.

Output current Value upon disable: Check this box to force an output of the current

Minimum Value at any time that the icon is disabled. If this box is not

checked, upon receipt of a disable signal, the Minimum calculation will be

momentarily suspended until the icon is re-enabled and no in-process value

will be output.

For example, if a Minimum is to be calculated over 10 samples but only 7

have been analyzed and the icon is disabled, the 7 sample Minimum Value

will be output and the Minimum Value detection will be suspended until re-

enabled. Upon re-enable, the detection will continue and after 3 more

samples are received, the 10 sample Minimum will be output (unless the

following check box is checked)

Clear Sample Count and Value upon Enable: Check this box to force a reset of the

Minimum Value as well as the Sample count used used for the calculation

upon receipt of an Enable signal.

If this box is not checked, upon receipt of an Enable signal, the Minimum

analysis will proceed from its suspended state (that it entered when it was

disabled).

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-54

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

MAXIMUM FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

Detects the maximum data value passing through the icon. The Maximum icon will

accumulate a User specified number of input samples, then calculate and output the

maximum value of this set of received input values.

For example, if a User wants to take temperature readings every 5 minutes and calculate

and store hourly maximums, a Program Net as shown could be used. The

Thermocouple icon is set to sample every 5 minutes per its attached Sample Rate Clock

and the Maximum icon is configured to analyze 12 readings (ie 12 readings x 5 minutes =

1 hour) then output the maximum value received in this set of 12 readings.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Maximum icon updates its output with the

maximum value after receiving and analyzing the User specified number of

readings.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Output after __ Samples: Specify the number of input readings to analyze before

outputting the maximum value in the group.

Output current Value upon disable: Check this box to force an output of the current

Maximum Value at any time that the icon is disabled. If this box is not

checked, upon receipt of a disable signal, the Maximum calculation will be

momentarily suspended until the icon is re-enabled and no in-process value

will be output.

For example, if a Maximum is to be calculated over 10 samples but only 7

have been analyzed and the icon is disabled, the 7 sample Maximum Value

will be output and the Maximum Value detection will be suspended until re-

enabled. Upon re-enable, the detection will continue and after 3 more

samples are received, the 10 sample Maximum will be output (unless the

following check box is checked)

Clear Sample Count and Value upon Enable: Check this box to force a reset of the

Maximum Value as well as the Sample count used used for the calculation

upon receipt of an Enable signal.

If this box is not checked, upon receipt of an Enable signal, the Maximum

analysis will proceed from its suspended state (that it entered when it was

disabled).

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-56

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

SUM FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

Sums the input values received for a User specified number of input updates.The Sum

icon will accumulate a User specified number of input samples, then calculate and output

the arithmetic sum of this set of received input values.

For example, if a User wants to record the daily and hourly flow totals from a pulse output

flow meter, the above net could be used. Assuming each pulse from the flow meter

equals 1 gallon, then the Counter can be set to accumulate pulses for an hour, then

output these hourly totals. These hourly totals are stored in memory (Hr-Total) and also

fed into the Summing icon. This Sum icon is configured to totalize (sum) 24 inputs, then

output the daily sum to memory ( the sum of 24, 1 hour totals equals one days total).

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Sum icon updates its output with the arithmetic

sum of the User specified number of input readings.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Output after __ Samples: Specify the number of input readings to totalize before

outputting the sum of the input readings.

Output current Value upon disable: Check this box to force an output of the current

Sum Value at any time that the icon is disabled. If this box is not checked,

upon receipt of a disable signal, the Summation calculation will be

momentarily suspended until the icon is re-enabled and no in-process value

will be output.

For example, if a Sum is to be calculated over 10 samples but only 7 have

been analyzed and the icon is disabled, the 7 sample Summation Value will

be output and the Summing calculation will be suspended until re-enabled.

Upon re-enable, the summing will continue and after 3 more samples are

received, the 10 sample Summation Value will be output (unless the

following check box is checked)

Clear Sample Count and Sum upon Enable: Check this box to force a reset of the

Summation Value as well as the Sample count used used for the

calculation upon receipt of an Enable signal.

If this box is not checked, upon receipt of an Enable signal, the Summation

calculation will proceed from its suspended state (that it entered when it

was disabled).

Clear Sum after Output: Check this box to force the Sum Value to be reset to 0 after

Output. If this box is not checked, the icon will perform as a totalizer

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-58

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

DUTY-CYCLE FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

Calculates the amount of time per a User defined time period, that the input signal is True

(on) or False (off). Connected to the LOGIC output of an upstream icon (eg an Event

icon) the Duty Cycle icon will determine the accumulated ON or OFF (True/False) time

over a User defined time period and output that data value at the end of each period. It is

to be used with Logic input signals.

NOTE: For integration of DATA type signals refer to the Integral icon.

For example, to determine the ON time (duty cycle) per hour of a pump in a water supply

lift station. The pump power is sensed by an Event input channel which is sampling the

pump status (on/off) every second. The Event icon output is connected to the Duty cycle

icon input and an Update Clock is connected to the Duty cycle icon Update terminal. The

Duty cycle icon Update Clock is set for 1 Hour. The Duty cycle icon then samples its

input at a 1 second rate and calculates and outputs the ON (OFF) duty cycle of the input

signal upon receipt of an Update Clock pulse (ie every hour).

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type (true/false).

Update Clock: Yes, specifies the time period over which the duty-cycle is

calculated

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Duty-cycle icon updates its output after receiving

an Update Command from the connected Update Clock. The Output will

be in Percent (ie a number from 0 to 100) or a decimal format (ie a number

from 0.0 to 1.0) depending on the User specified Report format within the

Configuration Dialog.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Calculate Per Period: Specify whether True (ON) or False (OFF) time per Period is to

be accumulated.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Report:

Specify if the output value is to be in Percent or in a Decimal format.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-60

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

TIME INTEGRATION FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

Calculates the time integral of data type input over a User defined integration period. The

Time Integral icon can only be used with DATA type inputs.

NOTE: For LOGIC type input time integration, refer to the Duty-Cycle icon.

For example, the Integral icon can be used in a Net (see above) to determine the hourly

flow total of oil through a pipe. The oil flow RATE is sampled every minute by a 4-20mA

flow transmitter and the signal is converted to GPM via a Math icon. This flow rate is then

connected to the Integral icon which calculates the hourly volume flow by integrating the

flow rate over time. The Sample Rate Clock connected to the Integral icon Update

terminal determines the integration period.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Data

Update Clock: Yes, specifies the time period over which the input signal is

integrated

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Integral icon updates its output with the new

integral value after receiving an Update Command from the connected

Update Clock.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Rate Timebase: Units per...

Specify the timebase (ie units per second, per minute, etc) for which

the input signal rate is specified. By providing this information, the Net

will automatically calculate the correct unit volume output based on the

integration period. In the above example, the flow rate was in GPM.

With a 1 hour integration period specified (by the User connected Rate

Clock), the Net will automatically generate the correct volume output.

If a timebase other than seconds, minutes, hours, or days is used, the

rate (Integral icon input) can be scaled by a math icon prior to

connection to the Integral icon to bring the timebase within the possible

timebase selections.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-62

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

MATH FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Math icon accepts one or two input signals, performs a User defined mathematical

calculation, then outputs the result. Equations are entered by the User and optionally

saved to a User-Defined math library. A Pre-Defined library of special equations is also

provided.

For example, if a User wants to calculate the temperature differential across a heat

exchanger radiator and store this `math channel’ to memory, a Net as shown above might

be used.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: One or Two Data type. If only one input is used, the other input

should be left unconnected.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Math calculation result.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

X and Y Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Names of the icons

connected to this icon’s Inputs. The Output Names can be changed in the

other icons’ dialogs.

Swap X and Y:

Clicking on the SWAP button swaps the X and Y input

connections. The change is reflected in the X and Y Input Name boxes as

well as in the actual Program Net where the connections are redrawn.

Math Function:

A text box is provided for entry of the equation to be calculated. In

the equation, use X and Y to represent the values at the X and Y inputs.

Supported math functions, their Syntax, and Explanations are provided in

the following table:

FUNCTION

Addition

Subtraction

Multiplication

Division

SYNTAX

X+7

X-20

X*1.2

X/2

EXPLANATION

Adds 7 to Input X

Subtracts 20 from Input X

Multiplies X times 1.2

Divides X by 2

Exponentiation

Exponential

Parenthesis

X^3

EXP(X)

2*(X-Y)

X cubed

e to Xth power

2 times the difference of the X Input

minus the Y Input

Y squared

Square

SQR(Y)

Square Root

SQRT(X)

Square root of X

11-64

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

Absolute Value

Natural Log

Zeroize

Log Base 10

Sine

ABS(Y)

LOG(Y)

ZERO(X)

LOG10(X)

SIN(Y)

Absolute value of Y

Natural log of Y

Zero if X is negative, X otherwise

Base 10 log of X

Sine of Y

Cosine

Tangent

COS(X)

TAN(Y)

Cosine of X

Tangent of Y

ArcCosine

ArcSine

ArcTangent

ArcTangent2

ACOS(X)

ASIN(X)

ATAN(X)

ATAN2(Y)

ArcCosine of X

ArcSine of X

ArcTangent of X

ArcTangent2 is accurate for values

of X very close to and equal to 0

Temperature calculation using type J

thermocouple input in mV (X) and

CJC input in ohms(Y)

Same as above for type K

Same as above for type E

Same as above for type T

Same as above for type R

Same as above for type S

TC converter¹

TC_J(X,Y)

TC converter

TC_K(X,Y)

TC_E(X,Y)

TC_T(X,Y)

TC_R(X,Y)

TC_S(X,Y)

Math Library: A math function library is provided for storing User defined equations

that may be used frequently.

To save a function, enter the equation in the Math Function text box, then

select Save To. A dialog will open allowing for User entry of a short

comment about the function to be saved. After entry of the comment,

selecting OK saves the function to the User Function Library for future

recall.

To retrieve a function for use, select Browse and a dialog will open allowing

access to the Pre-Defined Library equations (provided with HyperWare and

not editable by the User) as well as the User-Defined Library where User

added equations are retained. Highlight the equation and click on Use and

the function will be loaded into the Math Function text box.

Functions can be deleted by highlighting, then clicking on the Remove

button.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

Output When:

Defines when the Output is updated. If inputs to the icon are

updated at different times/rates (asynchronously), the User can specify

when the Output should be updated.

X or Y Updated - The Output is updated if either the X or the Y inputs are

Updated.

X input Updated - The Output is updated only when the X input is

Updated. If a calculation is performed that uses the Y input, the last Y

input value will be used in the calculation and the Output will be updated.

See Example Nets in Appendix B for application ideas on use of the TC Converter

functions.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Y input Updated - The Output is updated only when the Y input is

Updated. If a calculation is performed that uses the X input, the last X

input value will be used in the calculation and the Output will be updated.

Output Format:

The User can specify the data format for the Output from the icon.

In certain applications, additional processing speed and/or less memory

per stored sample can be realized.

Default to Input Formats - the default format. The data will be passed

using the same data format as the Inputs use. Note that if inputs are

received as integers, operations resulting in a decimal component (eg

division) will be output as integers with corresponding loss of precision

(trunction of decimal). If this is of concern, utilize the Floating Point format.

Floating Point - The Output data will be of Floating point format. Floating

Point format includes both the integer and decimal components (XXX.XXX)

of the calculation result.

Advantages of Floating Point mode:

1. This format will result in outputs that have no loss in

precision.

Disadvantages of Floating Point mode:

1. Calculations will perform slower than Long Integer mode. The

calculation speed may be 10x slower per operation than using

Long Integer mode.

2. If the Output is connected to a Memory icon, Floating Point

mode will always use 4 bytes for data storage.

Long Integer - The Input data will be converted to integer format, then the

calculation will be performed and output in signed Integer format. Signed

Integer format includes only the digits to the left of the decimal (XXXXX.)

Advantages of Long Integer mode:

1. Calculations will perform faster. Processing throughput rates

may be up to 10 times faster (per operation) than the

equivalent calculation using floating point math.

2. If the Output is connected to a Memory icon, Long Integer

mode will generally utilize a fewer number of bytes for data

storage. The number of bytes will dynamically size, from 1 to

4 bytes, according to the magnitude of the Output.

Disadvantages of Long Integer mode:

1. Input numerical precision will be lost if incoming data is in

floating point format. Precison will be lost in the conversion to

integer format (eg 26.3 becomes 26). If large numbers are

processed, this loss of precision may be negligible (eg

36785.2 becomes 36785).

2. Calculation results will be truncated to integers, hence any

decimal components will be lost (eg 10/3=3.33333 but will be

output as the integer 3). If large numbers are processed

and/or operations are performed that will not have decimal

results (addition,subtraction, multiplication, etc), this loss may

be negligible.

11-66

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

COMPARATOR (SETPOINT) FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Comparator icon performs a comparison between its X and Y inputs and Outputs a

Logic (True/False) signal depending on the result of the comparison. If the X input is

greater than the Y input, the Output is True. If the X input is less then the Y input, the

Output is False.

In the above net, when the temperature of the engine oil exceeds 130C, the relay output

will be energized. The Comparator has been configured with hysteresis of 10 degrees.

When the temperature drops to below 120C (130-10), the alarm will be turned off.

NOTE: Optionally utilize the Latch icon between the Comparator and the Alarm to latch

the Alarm ON once it turns on.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Two Data type inputs are required for operation.

Update Clock:

None

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

X and Y Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Names of the icons

connected to this icon’s Inputs. The Output Names can be changed in the

other icons’ dialogs.

Swap X and Y:

Clicking on the SWAP button swaps the X and Y input

connections. The change is reflected in the X and Y Input Name boxes as

well as in the actual Program Net where the connections are redrawn.

Comparator Function:

When the configuration dialog appears, the comparator is

configured to perform a simple comparison between X and Y, if X is

greater than or equal to Y, the Output is ON.

If the Hysteresis box is checked, an additional line is displayed with a text

box for entry of hysteresis (ie deadband) which is then included in the

comparison function. As shown, a Hysteresis of 10 degrees has been

specified. In this case, when the oil temperature rises to equal or greater

than 130C, the Output will turn ON. When the temperature of the oil drops

to less than 120C, the output will turn OFF.

Hysteresis is commonly used to prevent short cycling due to quick dynamic

system response and/or signal fluctuations and noise/jitter.

Output Name: Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

Output When:

Defines when the Output is updated. If inputs to the icon are

updated at different times/rates (asynchronously), the User can specify

when the Output should be updated.

X or Y Updated - The Output is updated if either the X or the Y inputs are

Updated.

11-68

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

X input Updated - The Output is updated only when the X input is

Updated. If a calculation is performed that uses the Y input, the last Y

input value will be used in the calculation and the Output will be updated.

Y input Updated - The Output is updated only when the Y input is

Updated. If a calculation is performed that uses the X input, the last X

input value will be used in the calculation and the Output will be updated.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

CONSTANT FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Constant icon represents a fixed User defined value. A typical application for the

Constant is as a threshold for use with the Comparator icon as shown below.

In the above net, when the temperature of the engine oil exceeds 130C, the relay output

will be energized.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: None.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type, fixed value of User definition.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Constant: Enter the constant value in this text box.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-70

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

LATCH FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Output turns ON and stays ON when the Input transitions from OFF to ON. The

Latch icon is commonly used in front of an Alarm output icon to force the Alarm to stay

ON once it is turned ON (see following Net).

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic ( True/False) type.

Update Clock:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Stays TRUE when ______ turns TRUE:

The Ouput name of the icon connected

to the Latch icon input is displayed in this function statement.

11-72

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

AND LOGIC FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Output turns TRUE ONLY when both of the Inputs are TRUE. If either or both of the

Inputs are FALSE, the Output is FALSE.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Two Logic (TRUE/FALSE) type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Output TRUEwhen: ___________ AND _________ are TRUE: HyperNet completes

this functional statement using the names of the Outputs from the icons

that are connected to this AND icon’s Inputs.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-74

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

OR LOGIC FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Output turns TRUE when either of the Inputs are TRUE. If both of the Inputs are

OFF, the Output is OFF.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Two Logic (True/False) type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Output TRUEwhen: ___________ OR _________ is TRUE:

HyperNet completes

this functional statement using the names of the Outputs from the icons

that are connected to this OR icon’s Inputs.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

XOR (EXCLUSIVE OR) LOGIC FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Output turns TRUE when the state of the two Inputs are different, ie ONLY ONE of

the Inputs is TRUE. If neither or both of the Inputs are TRUE, the Output is FALSE.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Two Logic (True/False) type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Output TRUE when: ___________ is DIFFERENT than _________:

HyperNet

completes this functional statement using the names of the Outputs from

the icons that are connected to this XOR icon’s Inputs.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-76

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

NOT (INVERTER) LOGIC FUNCTION ICON

The NOT icon inverts the signal as it passes through. When the Input isTrue the Output

is False. When the Input is False, the Output is True.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic (True/False) type.

Update Clock:

Enable:

None

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Output True when ________ is False:

HyperNet completes this functional

statement using the name of the Output from the icon that is connected to

this NOT (inverting) icon’s Inputs.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

TIMED COUNTER FUNCTION ICON

The Timed Counter is a software counter that can be used within a Net for accumulating

transitions over a fixed period of time( for example: counting pulses received per hour). In

concept, this icon performs a similar function as a hardware counter input such as the

GPDI in the Counter mode. However, the difference is that the Timed Counter is a

software version that can be used to count transitions received from other software icons

such as the Comparator.

The icon is has an Update Clock input that specifies the time period over which it is to

accumulate the transitions received on its Input. The Net shown below counts the

number of times per hour a temperature exceeds the 1400F threshold and stores this

OverTemps per hour value in memory.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic (True/False) type.

Update Clock:

Specifies the period of time over which the count is accumulated.

When an Update command is received, the current count is output and

counting resumes (optionally it can be reset to 0 before counting resumes)

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The accumulated count is output.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

When ______ Update pulse is received, output the _____ count total: HyperNet

completes this functional statement using the names of the Outputs from

the icons that are connected to this Counter icon’s Enable and Signal

Inputs.

Clear Counter on Output: If this check box is checked, after the accumulated count

total is passed to the Output, the total will be cleared and counting will

restart from 0. If the box is not checked, counting will be cumulative,

adding on to the current total.

11-78

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

Count Rising / Falling Edges: The Up Counter increments its accumulated count

when its input changes state. The User can use this option to specify

whether Rising (False to True) or Falling (True to False) transitions

(edges)are to be counted.

Output Count upon disable: Check this box to force an output of the accumulated

Count at any time that the icon is disabled. If this box is not checked, upon

receipt of a disable signal, the Counting function will be momentarily

suspended until the icon is re-enabled and no in-process value will be

output.

For example, if a Count is to be output when a one hour Update Pulse has

been received but only 20 minutes have gone by and the icon is disabled,

the 20 minute sample Count total will be output and the counting function

will be suspended until re-enabled. Upon re-enable,counting will continue

and after 40 more minutes, the hourly Count Total will be output (unless

the following check box is checked)

Count Rising / Falling Edges:

The Timed Counter increments its accumulated

count when its input changes state. The User can use this option to

specify whether Rising (False to True) or Falling (True to False) transitions

(edges)are to be counted.

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon. Conversion to other units can be performed within a

Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto this icon’s output.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

UP COUNTER FUNCTION ICON

The Up Counter is a software counter that can be used within a Net to count up to a User

defined count value, then output the count. After outputting the count, the Up Counter

clears the counter and starts counting up again.

An example application follows:

An input signal (logic) is generated every time a widget is produced on a production line.

The User wants to log the time to produce 100 widgets. With the Up Counter

programmed to 100, every time 100 event inputs are accumulated, the icon will output the

value 100 to memory.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic (True/False) type.

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The accumulated count is output.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

11-80

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s Input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Output Count after ____ input transitions received: When the number of

transitions received on the Up Counter’s Input equals this User supplied

value, the value is passed to the Output and the count resumes again at 0.

Count Rising / Falling Edges: The Up Counter increments its accumulated count

when its input changes state. The User can use this option to specify

whether Rising (False to True) or Falling (True to False) transitions

(edges)are to be counted.

Output Count upon disable: Check this box to force an output of the accumulated

Count at any time that the icon is disabled. If this box is not checked, upon

receipt of a disable signal, the Counting function will be momentarily

suspended until the icon is re-enabled and no in-process value will be

output.

For example, if a Count is to be output after 100 samples have been

received but only 60 have been received and the icon is disabled, the 60

sample Count total will be output and the counting function will be

suspended until re-enabled. Upon re-enable,counting will continue and

after 40 more samples are received, the 100 sample Count Total will be

output (unless the following check box is checked)

Clear Transition and Input Counts upon Enable: Check this box to force a reset of

the accumulated Count Total as well as the Sample count used used for the

calculation upon receipt of an Enable signal.

If this box is not checked, upon receipt of an Enable signal, counting

calculation will proceed from its suspended state (that it entered when it

was disabled).

Clear Counter on Output: Check this box to force the Count Value to be reset to 0

after Output. If this box is not checked, the icon will perform as a counting

totalizer

Units:

Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the

output from this icon. Conversion to other units can be performed within a

Program Net by adding a Math Icon onto this icon’s output.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

SAMPLE RATE CLOCK FUNCTION ICON

The Sample Rate Clock icon generates the Update signal/command used throughout

Nets to set Sampling Rates of the different input type icons. (The icon derives its clock

rate from a OMP-MODL internal clock.)

When the Sample Rate Clock generates an Update command, it causes the connected

icons to read their inputs, process the signal accordingly, then Update their Outputs.

Sample Rate Clocks within a Net set the pace at which the various branches of the

Program Net sequence.

Multiple Sample Rate Clocks can be used within a single Program Net to provide different

sampling rates.

INPUTS:

Alternate Rate Input:

Logic type input. The Sample Rate Clock has a Logic

Input terminal that is used to control which of two clock rates will be output

(see Sample Rate Clock Configuration Dialog below) .

If the Alternate Rate Input is left unconnected, Update pulses will be output

at the standard rate. If connected to a Logic type (True/False) Output from

another icon (as shown in the Net below), the state of this signal will

determine which of two rates will be used. When the Input is LOW, the

Standard Update rate will be output. When the Input is TRUE (in the Net

below, when an overtemp condition occurs) , the Alternate faster Clock

Update rate will be output.

11-82

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

NOTE: The link (connection to the Alternate Rate Input on the Sample

Rate Clock is unique in that it feeds back from an Output terminal to an

Input terminal that is to the left on the screen. This is the only link that can

be connected this way. To make the connection, drag the link from the

Sample Rate Clock Input terminal to the Output terminal (left to right).

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

The Enable terminal can be left unconnected, connected to a Start/Stop

Clock icon, or connected to any other logic signal. This could control the

generation of Update signals as a condition of some other parameter.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Update type. The Sample Rate Clock icon is the only icon that

can generate an Update command/signal. (The Warm-up icon does not

actually generate an Update signal, it just passes it through).

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Never use Alternate Rate / Use Alternate Rate when _____ is True: If the Alternate

Rate Input is left unconnected, Never use Alternate Rate will be displayed.

When a link is made to the Alternate Rate Input, Use Alternate Rate when

`_____’ is True is displayed. In quotes, HyperNet displays the Output

Name of the icon connected to the Alternate Rate Input terminal. The

displayed Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s dialog.

Update pulse every:

A text box is provided for User entry of a number. The

units (seconds, minutes, hours, days) can be specified via the list box.

NOTE: To specify Update signal rates faster than 1 second, set the

Sample Rate Clock Resolution to milliseconds from within the Global

icon Configuration dialog. Use of the millisecond setting will result in

higher power consumption as the OMP-MODL microprocessor is

continually running during this mode. In the Seconds mode, the

microprocessor is put to a low power `sleep’ mode during times of

inactivity.

NOTE: In MILLISECOND Mode, logging sessions must be

limited to a maximum length of 2 weeks. This limitation

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

holds for both Rotary and Log to Full Memory modes.

This 2 week limit is due to a maximum time count that the

OMP-MODL can internally store at the faster clock rate.

For sessions longer than 2 weeks, utilize the SECOND

mode. Refer to Global icon listing for additional

information.

Alternate Rate:

If a Logic link is connected to the Alternate Rate Input terminal, the

Alternate Rate setting is enabled. Enter the Update pulse rate to be used

when the Alternate Rate Input connection is True.

11-84

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

WARM-UP FUNCTION ICON

The Warm-up icon is is a special two Output terminal icon. It immediately outputs a logic

signal on one terminal upon receipt of an Update signal, then after a User programmed

delay, passes the Update signal to its second Output.

The typical application for the Warm-Up icon is to provide control of a power supply for

excitation of a sensor or transmitter and a short delay until the sensor/transmitter is read.

The following example Net illustrates that application. Upon receipt of the Update

command from the Sample Rate Clock, the Warm-up icon immediately cycles its Logic

Output terminalTrue which turns on the connected Relay Alarm icon to power up a

24VDC power supply for the 4-20mA loop excitation. The icon then waits for a User

defined period of time, then passes the Update command to the connected mA-Lo (4-

20ma) Input icon which then takes a sample. The next time the Net is executed, the

power supply is turned OFF.

INPUTS:

Update:

The icon immediately turns its Logic Output True when an Update

command is received. The Output staysTrue until the User provided time

expires.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when the Enable pin is

unconnected or when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal 1:

Logic type. The Logic Output turnsTrue and staysTrue

immediately after receipt of an Update command.

Output Signal 2:

Update type. The Update command is passed through the icon

after a User defined delay (warm-up time).

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

WarmUp Time A text box is provided for User specification of the desired warmup time

delay between the Logic Output turnTrue and the pass through of the

Update command. The time is in seconds.

Output Name:

Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly

under the Output terminal within the Program Net.

11-86

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

START/STOP CLOCK FUNCTION ICON

The Start/Stop Clock icon generates a Logic output that is a function of a User defined

time. Two different modes of operation are available, Absolute Start/Stop and Delayed

Start/Stop.

Absolute Start/Stop Mode: In this mode, the icon output is True for a User defined

window of time. The User can specify the Start and Stop dates and times.

Delayed Start/Stop Mode: The icon output goes True at a User specified elapsed

time after the OMP-MODL is Enabled, then stays True for a User specified

length of time before returning False.

NOTE: In both modes, after the Start/Stop clock `stops’, the OMP-MODL will continue to

be Enabled. However, any icons in the Net that are controlled by the Start/Stop icon will

not update. Alarms will remain in the state they are in when the Stop occurs.

A typical application of this icon is to enable an unattended OMP-MODL at some

particular future time, then disable after a period of time. The following Net illustrates that

application:

INPUTS:

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

windows.

Logic type. The Output is True during User defined time

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX (ABSOLUTE START/STOP MODE):

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS (ABSOLUTE START/STOP MODE):

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Absolute Start / Stop or Delayed Start Mode: Specifies the mode of operation. The

time setting boxes will change accordingly.

Start On:

A text box is provided for User entry of the date and time

to turn the OutputTrue.

Stop On:

A text box is provided for User entry of the date and time

to turn the Output OFF.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

11-88

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX (DELAYED START/STOP MODE):

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS (ABSOLUTE START/STOP MODE):

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Absolute Start / Stop or Delayed Start Mode: Specifies the mode of operation. The

time setting boxes will change accordingly.

Start After (elapsed HH:MM:SS): A text box is provided for User entry of

the time to delay before starting (turning the Output True).

Stay ON for:

A text box is provided for User entry of the time to leave

the Output True.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

PERIODIC OUTPUT FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Periodic Output Icon generates a Square Wave/Pulse output based upon time values

entered by the user in the configuration dialog box. When the icon’s Enable pin goes HI,

the output remains LOW for a specified period. The output then goes HI for a user defined

period before going back to a LOW state. This cycle is then repeated a specified number

of times or continuously. There are two modes of operation that define the icon’s behavior

when its Enable pin returns LOW, Reset Upon Disable, and Suspend While Disabled.

Reset Upon Enable: In this mode, whenever the Enable input goes from HI to LOW,

the operation is reset. The next time the Enable pin goes HI, the cycle starts

from the beginning.

Suspend While Disabled: In this mode, whenever the Enable input goes from HI to

LOW, the operation is suspended. All timers are put on hold while the

Enable is LOW. The next time the Enable goes HI, operation continues

where it left off.

The above net displays a typical application. The Periodic Output Icon is used to cycle a

OMP-MODL Relay Output On and Off at regular intervals.

Another possible application is to insert a time delay into an Event (Logic Type) signal

branch.

NOTE: At least one Sample Rate Clock icon is required in every net program. This icon

must always be enabled (Enable pin disconnected or ON).

INPUTS:

Enable:

Processing of icon is allowed when Enable pin is connected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic Type. The output is TRUE during user defined time

windows.

11-90

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Reset Upon Enable/Suspend While Enabled: Specifies the mode of operation..

Delay to Initial Turn-On: Amount of time after the Enable input goes HI, that the

output remains LOW. If the Enable pin is not connected, it is HI. In this

case, the Delay is the time delay after enabling the OMP-MODL itself.

On Duration:. Amount of time the output remains HI.

Off Duration:..Amount of time the output remains LOW.

Number of Cycles to Repeat: Number of times that the specified cycle will repeat.

Entering zero will cause the cycle to repeat continuously.

NOTE: The Delay to Initial Turn-On time is not repeated.

Output Name:Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly under the

Output terminal within the Program Net.

NOTE: The millisecond entry box is disabled if the mS mode is not selected in the

Global icon.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

STOP LOGGING FUNCTION ICON

When the Stop Logging icon receives a Logic True input, it stops the OMP-MODL

execution of the Program Net. The function is the same as if the front panel STOP

button were pressed.

In the following example Net, if the flow ever drops to less than 10GPH, the OMP-MODL

will stop logging. In this Net, logging will not restart, even if the flow increases to over

10GPH again.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: Logic type (True/False). A True signal on this input Stops

execution of the OMP-MODL Program Net..

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when the Enable pin is

unconnected or when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Internal system control output only. No output terminal shown on

icon for Program Net connections.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

No Configuration Dialog is provided.

11-92

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

WARNING FUNCTION ICON

The Warning icon outputs a True Logic signal while any of five User selected system

conditions are true. Multiple Warning icons can be used in a Program Net to initiate

alarming or other action upon different conditions. The following example illustrates

activation of a Page (and front panel LED) if the Logger memory fills to 90%.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: None, internal system status only. No terminals shown for icon

connections in Net.

Enable:

Processing of the icon is allowed when the Enable pin is unconnected or

when connected and Enable signal is TRUE.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic (True/False). Output is TRUE only while any of the five

conditions are true. A Latch icon can be connected to the Output of this

icon if a latching function is desired.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name:Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Output is True when:

Check boxes are provided for User selection of up to five

conditions, any of which will cause the icon Output to go True. Note that

the Output will only stay TRUE while the condition is true. The five

conditions are:

1. Memory Becomes __%Full - Output latches TRUE if Logger

memory is filled to the specified percentage. Output goes

LOW when Memory is cleared (unless some other conditon is

true, forcing the Warning icon Output TRUE).

2. Sample Missed - Output latches TRUE if a sample is missed

(ie not taken at the Sample Rate Clock commanded time)

during execution of a Program Net. This can occur if a Net

requires more time to process than the User has specified via

Sample Rate Clock Update rates. Note that missing a sample

does not cause the Program Net to stop. The Output is reset

LOW when the Program Net is Stopped.

3. Power Failure - a Power Failure occurs when the Logger

power supply voltage falls below a useable level. If this

occurs, the Logger stops execution of the Program Net,

preserves data memory, and sets a memory marker (flag) that

indicates that a Power Failure has occurred. When the power

to the Logger returns, the Warning icon Output latches TRUE

indicating that a Power Failure has occurred, and the Logger

will automatically resume execution of the Program Net

however the icon Output will remain TRUE. The Output is set

LOW when the Program Net is stopped. This condition is

mainly used to indicate to a User that a Power Failure

occurred at some time. For warning of impending power

failure, use the Power Low condition (above).

4. System RESET - if a System RESET occurs, the Output

latches TRUE. The Watch-Dog Timer or a front panel RESET

can cause a System RESET to occur. The Output is set LOW

when the Program Net is stopped.

5. Runtime Error - if a Runtime Error occurs, the Output latches

TRUE. Runtime errors should normally not occur, but could

be caused by a corrupted Program Net in the Logger’s

memory. A Runtime error could also be caused by

incompatible Logger and HyperWare versions. The Output is

set LOW when the Program Net is stopped.

Output Name:

Specify a name for the Output signal from this icon. This Output

Name will be referenced by other icons downstream in the Program Net.

11-94

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

GLOBAL FUNCTION ICON

The Global icon provides for User specification of various OMP-MODL system settings

that may be used during the execution of a Program Net. No Input or Output terminals

are available on the icon.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal: None.

Enable:

None. Icon is always enabled.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

None

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify a label for the icon. This label will appear directly below

the icon. A suggested use for this name is to enter the filename for the

Program Net... allowing for quick future reference.

Program Name:

A short (16 characters maximum) Program Net name can be

entered via this text box. This name can be accessed on the OMP-MODL

front panel LCD as well as through a Status Query serial communication

command.

Program Description:

A short (32 characters maximum) Program Net

description can be entered via this text box. This name can be accessed on

the OMP-MODL front panel LCD as well as through a Status Query serial

communication command.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Memory: Three selections are available for utilization of the OMP-MODL memory:

Log to Full Memory and STOP Processing - if selected, the OMP-MODL

will log data until memory is filled, then stop execution of the Program Net

and go into a low power sleep mode.

NOTE: If MILLISECOND Sample Clock Resolution is selected (see below)

logging sessions must be limited to a maximum length of 40 days.

Log to Full Memory and CONTINUE Processing - if selected, the OMP-

MODL will log data until memory is filled, then continue the execution of

the Program Net excluding the storage of data to memory. This mode

allows all of the non-Memory icons in the Program Net to continue

operation providing continued Alarm, Probe Point, etc access.

NOTE: If MILLISECOND Sample Clock Resolution is selected (see below)

memory must be filled before a maximum of 40 days after Enabling the

OMP-MODL . Processing will continue after the 40 day limitation.

Rotary Memory - if selected, the OMP-MODL will log data until the

memory is filled, then begin overwriting the oldest sample in memory.

Processing of the complete Program Net will continue as normal.

NOTE: If MILLISECOND Sample Clock Resolution is selected (see below)

logging sessions must be limited to a maximum length of 40 days.

Sample Clock Resolution: Two options are available for selecting the time

resolution of the OMP-MODL.

SECONDS - This mode should be used for all Program Nets that have

Sample Rate Clocks set at 1 second or slower. In this mode, the OMP-

MODL `sleeps’ in a low-power mode during times of inactivity, providing

extended battery life. Sample Rate Clocks can be set as fast as 1 second.

MILLISECONDS - This mode must be used if any Sample Rate Clocks will

be set at faster than 1 second rates. In this mode, the OMP-MODL can

resolve time increments as small as 1/1000 of a second. NOTE: Use of the

millisecond mode will result in higher power consumption as the OMP-

MODL microprocessor is continually operating. Depending on the Program

Net, the energy consumption in this mode may be approximately 10 to 15

times higher than in the SECOND mode.

NOTE: In MILLISECOND Mode, logging sessions must be

limited to a maximum length of 40 days. This limitation

holds for both Rotary and Log to Full Memory modes.

This 40 day limit is due to a maximum time count that the

OMP-MODL can internally store at the faster clock rate.

For sessions longer than 40 days, utilize the SECOND

mode.

Recalibration Period:

The OMP-MODL performs various self-calibrations during

execution of a Program Net. The User can specify the frequency of these

calibrations. If a 0 is entered for the period, a recalibration will be

performed at the start of each Program Net execution. If speed is not of

concern, entering 0 for each of the recalibration periods will result in

optimum performance.

ADC - the analog to digital converter used within the OMP-MODL and

much of the analog circuitry incorporated into Interface Modules can drift

over time and temperature fluctuations. By performing a recalibration,

most of this drift can be nulled. Specify the period in seconds between

recalibrations.

11-96

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

CJC - a Cold Junction Compensation sensor is mounted near the terminal

strip header on the inside of the MLAD-1.. The temperature it measures at

the terminal strip is used during thermocouple millivolt to temperature

conversions (MLIM-1). This CJC Recalibration Period specifies how

frequently the CJC temperature is checked and updated in the

thermocouple calculation equation. Any temperature error in the

measurement at the terminal strip will result in a nearly equal error in the

thermocouple reading.

TIP: If a short duration test is being performed where

maximum speed of thermocouple readings is required,

sufficient accuracy may be achieved by setting the

Recalibration Period fairly long. In this way, a CJC

recalibration will be done before the first pass through the

Program Net, then the high speed readings will be taken,

then another CJC recalbration. During the test, the

terminal strip thermal mass will keep the CJC temperature

fairly constant.

Battery - the internal power supply voltage is checked periodically based

on the User specified Recalibration Period. This Battery voltage is used by

the Warning icon for detection of a Power Low condition and for update of

the OMP-MODL front panel LCD System Supply Voltage display. For most

applications of OMP-MODLs this period can be set fairly long (eg 3600

seconds) as battery voltage droops slowly. If additional loads are being

powered such as modems, outputs, etc shorten this value accordingly.

If the Warning icon is not being used and battery voltage will not be

checked via the LCD or through a serial communication Status Query, this

Recalibration Period can be set very long.

Auto-answer after __ ring: If a OMP-MODL is equipped with a modem, the number

of rings to wait before answering the call can be User defined. Enter the

number in the provided text box.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

HISTOGRAM FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Histogram icon compares its input value with a user specified range. If the input

value falls within the range, its internal counter is incremented. When a user specified

number of inputs have been compared, the icon outputs its count.

For example, in the net shown above, five different Histogram icons are being used to

monitor how often the pressure input falls within five different ranges. Each icon is set to

compare the same number of samples before outputting its count.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal:

Data type.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Histogram icon outputs it count after receiving the

user specified number of samples.

11-98

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Name: In this box, HyperNet displays the Output Name of the icon connected to

this icon’s input. The Output Name can be changed in the other icon’s

dialog.

Output Totals After ___ Samples: When the number of samples specified have been

received and compared, the icon will output the count of how many

samples fell within the specified range.

Clear Sample Count and Totals upon Enable: The icon keps track of how many

samples it has compared, as well as how many fell into the specified range.

Check this box to force a reset of both counts upon receipt of an enable

signal.

Clear Totals After Output: Check this box to force the icon to clear the count after it is

output.

Units: Provides a text box for User entry of a units label that will be shown at the output

from this icon.

Count incremented when the input satisfies the following conditions: Specifies the

range that the input must fall within in order to increment the icon’s counter.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Remote Control icon has a logic output that can be controlled real-time by the user.

This output can be connected to the logic input of any other icon.

INPUTS:

Update Clock: Output is updated to the last user selected state upon each Update

clock pulse. For example, it the connected Update clock is set for 60 sec.,

and the output state is changed by the user via HyperWare(described

below), the actual state of the output will not update until the icon receives

an Update pulse which may be up to 60 seconds later.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Logic type. The Remote Control icon updates its output after

receiving a user generated command to do so from HyperWare.

For example, the portion of a net program depicted above shows posible uses for the

Remote Control icon.The Remote Control icons labeled “Relay #1” and “Relay #2” are

connected to the logger’s relay output icons. This would enable the user to control the

state of the logger’s hardware relay outputs real-time. The Remote Control icon labled

“Log T-In” is connected to the Enable input on a Thermocouple icon which is set to log

data to memory. Whenever the Thermocouple’s enable input is ON, the channel will

sample. Conversely, if its Enable input is OFF, it will not sample. This setup allows the

user to turn on different portions of a net program at will

11-100

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

Remote Control icons can be accessed from the HyperTrack Real Time Display window.

The button used to monitor/change the states of Remote Control icons is shown above.

Clicking this button will cause HyperWare to query the logger for the names and

corresponding states of its Remote Control icons. HyperWare will then display the

following dialog box.

The states of each icon can then be selected. Clicking “OK” will cause HyperWare to sent

the appropriate commands to the logger, telling it to update the Remote Control Ions

accordingly.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Initial State: This is the state of the icon’s output uon enabling

11-102

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

HAP FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The HAP icon is used in conjunction with the Omega Engineering HyperWare Automation

Program (HAP) application. Hap is a stand-alone application separate from HyperWare,

that automates most of HyperWare’s communication functions. .. When the HAP icon’s

input goes TRUE, the icon will initiate communication with a PC that is running the HAP

application.The icon will tell HAP which functions to perform. based on the information

entered in the configuration dialog. HAP will then proceed to perform those functions.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal:

Data type.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type(Optional). The HAP icon turns on its output if it was

unable to connect to HAP. The output will remain ON untill the next time

the HAP icon fires off

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Output Name:Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly under the

Output terminal within the Program Net.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

Modem/RS-232: Specifies the type of communication

Phone Number: This is the phone number that will be called if telephone modem

communication is selected.

Retries: If a call is unsuccessful, the dialing sequence will be repeated the specified

number of times.

Retry Delay: If a call is unsuccessful, the logger will wait the specified time before

attempting again.

Output Upon Communication Failure: Checking this box will cause an output to

appear. This outup goes TRUE if a the logger fails to connect to the PC.

Pop-Up Message: Causes a pop-up message. to be displayed on the PC running HAP.

This message will contain some basic header information as well as the

following if selected.

Send All Active Messages: If this bo is cheked, the Pop-up message will contain all

active system messages.

Custom Message: If this box is checked a custom message can be entered.

Data Download: Check this box to perform a download of logger memory.

Base Download Filename: Specifies the first few characters of the downloaded

filename. HAP will append the base filename with “__last”. If a file with that

name already exists, hap will rename the older file to the base filename

appended with __X where X is a number

Data Download File Format, *HLD/*XLS/*CSV: Specify the output file type.

Clear Memory After Download: Check this box to clear memory after the data is

downloaded.

Generate Report: Check this box to generate an Excel report.

Use Report Template Name: Specify the report template to use. This template must

be generated using HAP

Output Report Name: Name of the report file

11-104

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

TEXT NOTE ICON

FUNCTION:

The Text Note icon provides a means to add user comments to a specific portion of a net

program. The Text Note icon is located at the right-hand end of the sipnnable toolbar as

depicted below.

The Text Note is not the same as other icons in that it doesn’t actually process any data.

It only displays text within the net program. Although the icon does not perform any

function when the net program is run, it is an integral part of the net and remains intact

when uploaded/downloaded to the logger. An example of a net that contains Text Note

icons is shown below.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

INPUTS:

None

OUTPUTS:

None.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Lines 1,2 & 3: Simply enter the text that is to be displayed into the three boxes.

11-106

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON REFERENCE

RATE OF CHANGE FUNCTION ICON

FUNCTION:

The Rate of Change icon calculates and outputs the rate of change of a signal for a user

specified number of samples. A “sliding” calculation is performed each time the input is

updated. For example, if the user-entered number of samples is 5, after the 5th sample is

taken, the 1st and 5th samples are used for the calculation. The next time sample is

taken, the 2nd and 6th are used and so on.

INPUTS:

Data/Logic Signal:

Data type.

OUTPUTS:

Output Signal:

Data type. The Rate of Change icon updates its output after

receiving the user specified number of samples and calculation the Rate of

Chnge.

ICON CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX:

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS:

Icon Name: Specify the label for the icon. This name will show directly under the icon

within the Program Net.

Input Rate Time Base: Specifies ttime base of the output. For example if Seconds is

selected and the input is temperature, the output would be the rate of

change of the input in degrees per second.

Number of Samples: Specifies the number of samples that defines the time interval

used for the calculation.(dtm samples/intervals???).

Output Name:Specify the label for the Output. This name will show directly under the

Output terminal within the Program Net.

Units: Provides a text box for user entry of a units label that will be shown at the output

from this icon

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX A: MASTER ICON FILE REFERENCE

11-108

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

APPENDIX B: EXAMPLE PROGRAM NETS

Following are some example Program Nets with descriptions of their operation.

Engine Oil Cooler Performance Test:

Two thermocouples are configured to sample inlet and outlet oil temperatures every

30 seconds on a heat exchanger. Logging of data only occurs when the engine

ignition is ON. The state of the ignition is checked every second via the 1 second

Sample Rate Clock and the GPDI input configured as an Event input.

When the inlet and outlet temperatures are enabled, a delta-T calculation is

performed and the inlet, outlet, and differential temperature is stored to memory.

Probe icons are available for display of all three temperatures from the LCD and/or

via a serial link.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

Hydraulic Pump Performance Test

The above Net is designed for collecting data from a hydraulic pump on a vehicle

during periods of high fluid temperature operation only. Two thermocouple channels

and a continually powered pressure transducer are sources of input signals.

After Enabling the Net, the inputs are sampled every 30 seconds. When the Tinlet

temperature exceeds 160F (Comparator and Constant icons), data storage to

memory is Enabled for all three parameters and the OMP-MODL front panel LCD

displays a message stating that the temperature currently exceeds 160F and data is

being logged to memory.

The DC voltage from the pressure transducer is converted to PSI via the Math icon.

Instantaneous values for the two temperatures and pressure are accessible on the

OMP-MODL LCD and/or through a serial connection via the Probe icons.

11-110

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

Tank Level / Inventory Profiling Data Collection with Alarming:

A remote site liquid tank has a constantly varying inventory as liquid is added and

removed over time. Profiling of the inventory over time, onsite display of the

inventory amount, and overflow telephone pager alarming are all desired.

Using a single 4-20mA pressure transmitter input and a Math icon, the inventory can

be calculated in gallons. The pressure transmitter is powered from a battery which is

cycled ON 10 seconds prior to reading, then OFF with the Relay icon and the

Warmup icon.

Every 30 minutes, the inventory is logged to memory as well as compared

(Comparator icon) to four different thresholds, 100, 200, 300, and 400 thousand

gallons. The current level is displayed on the OMP-MODL front panel LCD.

In the event that the top threshold (full) is met, a Page is sent with a code of `111’.

Additionally, every minute, a float type level switch is read via the GPDI icon in the

Event mode. When the tank gets too close to overflowing, the switch closes. This

signal is then sent to the Pager icon and a Page of `999’ is sent.

A separate Program Net branch is added to initiate a Page of `222’ if the OMP-

MODL memory fills or a Run-time error occurs.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

High Speed Thermocouple Application:

In some applications, maximum speed of thermocouple measurement is desired.

The Thermocouple icon is one of the slowest to process in a Program Net due to the

intensive math associated with each sample. A Cold Junction Compensation

reading is required as well as the thermocouple reading, then the two are combined

through curve approximating polynomials... heavy math for the OMP-MODL.

A method to improve on the throughput rate of thermocouple inputs exists. If the

thermocouple inputs are read as mV signals (which are processsed very quickly) and

the CJC is read as a resistance (which is lots faster than temperature), the net will

process many times faster. The mV readings from the Thermocouple icon and the

resistance reading from the CJC icon are then merged in a Post-Processing Net and

the results (in degrees) are put into a destination *.HLD file for plotting.

The following Program Net represents an application of this method of high speed

thermocouple temperature data collection. Temperature rise data on components

within an automobile brake is desired. Thermocouples are installed and connected

to OMP-MODL input channels configured as mV inputs. The CJC input is sent to

memory in units of OHMS.

A unique triggering scheme is implemented with the Event icon and three Sample

Rate Clocks. One Sample Rate Clock causes the Event icon to sample the status of

a switch connected to the brake pedal every 10mS. When the switch is open (ie

brakes NOT activated) the CJC icon is enabled and the Sample Rate Clock sends a

reading to memory every second. Additionally,. the 50mS Sample Rate Clock is

sampling at its primary rate which is set to 1 second.

When the brake pedal is depressed, the CJC icon is disabled and the 50mS Sample

Rate Clock driving the three Voltage icons (thermocouple inputs) switches to its

Alternate rate, storing readings to memory every 50mS.

After the data has been collected and downloaded to the PC, a Post-Processing Net

is constructed as shown in the following diagram.

11-112

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

This Post-Processing Net combines the voltage data from the thermocouple input

channels and the CJC readings (in ohms) to calculate the actual temperature of each

of the three thermocouple channels and store the data in a new destination file

called BRAKETST.HLD. This special calculation is done using the function

TC_J(X,Y) in each of the three Math icons.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

NOTES:

11-114

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

During the installation of the HyperWare package, the following files and directories

are created on the PC hard disk. The file listing uses the default sub-directory

names offered during the installation process. If different names were chosen by the

User during installation, the files will be installed in those respective directories.

To uninstall the HyperWare software, locate and delete all of the listed files from the

hard drive (with the exception noted below). Note that no modifications are done to

the Windows system or configuration files during the installation process.

During the install, a text file called install.log is generated in the \hyperwar directory.

Review this file for the most current listing of installed files.

HyperWare installation generated files:

Path and File

Description

\HYPERWAR\HYPERLOG.EXE

\HYPERWAR\WAVE.EXE

Main HyperWare program

HyperPlot graphing program

\HYPERWAR\BC402RTL.DLL

\HYPERWAR\BIDS402.DLL

\HYPERWAR\OWL202.DLL

\HYPERWAR\DBWIN.DLL

\HYPERWAR\DIBAPI.DLL

\HYPERWAR\CLIB.DLL

program library

\HYPERWAR\HYPERWAR.HLP

\HYPERWAR\NOTES.TXT

\HYPERWAR\DATAx.HLD

\HYPERWAR\DEMO_X.NET

Help file

I/O Wiring List comments

Example download files

Example Program Net files

\HYPERWAR\TEST.PST

\HYPERWAR\TEST.PRB

\HYPERWAR\TEST.NET

\HYPERWAR\TEST.HLD

\HYPERWAR\README.TXT

\HYPERWAR\INSTALL.LOG

Example Post-Processing Net

Example HyperTrack Net

Example OMP-MODL Program Net

Example OMP-MODL Download file

Late breaking notes and comments

A listing of file installed during setup

\WINDOWS\MATH.LIB

Math function library

\WINDOWS\HYPERLOG.INI

Program configuration file

NOTE: During the HyperWare installation process, a file called BWCC.DLL is

installed into the Windows directory (if it does not already exist in that directory).

This file is common to many different software applications and should not be

removed as it may be required by these other applications.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX C: HYPERWARE FILE LISTING

NOTES:

11-116

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX E: CHANGING THE OMP-MODL EPROM

APPENDIX D: CHANGING THE CLOCK / MEMORY

BACKUP BATTERY

The OMP-MODL internal memory and real-time clock are powered from a

Panasonic BR2325 (or equivalent) lithium cell when the OMP-MODL Main Power

EXTERNAL POWER FUSE

LITHIUM CELL

BATTERY PIGTAIL & CONNECTOR

ML006

switch is OFF. The cell is mounted in a socket located on the bottom of the MLCPU-

1 module and is accessed by removing the bottom plate/hanger or ML-BATT

module.

To change the lithium cell:

1. Download any valuable data retained in OMP-MODL memory.

2. Turn off the OMP-MODL power

3. Remove the side retaining screws ( 4 ) holding the bottom plate

or ML-BATT module in place.

4. The lithium cell is located in the socket on the exposed circuit

board.

5. Gently pry the cell to be replaced out of its holder with a small,

blunt, non-metallic tool being careful not to puncture the cell or

damage any surrounding circuitry. Insulated tweezers may

assist in pulling the cell out of the holder. Use care during this

step so that the spring loaded contact is not bent up excessively.

6. Slide a new cell (Panasonic BR2323 or equivalent) into the

holder with the positive terminal UP. A properly installed cell

will seat approximately flush with the top of the socket.

7. Reassemble the bottom plate and/or ML-BATT module onto the

MLCPU-1 module and reinstall the four side retaining screws.

8. Power up the OMP-MODL. Clear the unit memory and upon

loading of a new Program Net, the unit is ready to deploy.

11-118

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX E: CHANGING THE OMP-MODL EPROM

CAUTION

Use care in handling lithium cells. Currently

manufactured cells such as the BR2325 are very

stable and safe parts, however, DO NOT TEMPT

FATE! Do not puncture, short, or dispose of in fire

as explosions could occur.

CAUTION

The exposed MLCPU-1 circuit board is sensitive to

damage from static discharge. Discharge body

static before working with the OMP-MODL by

touching a grounded surface. Call with any

questions!

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX E: CHANGING THE OMP-MODL EPROM

NOTES:

11-120

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX E: CHANGING THE OMP-MODL EPROM

APPENDIX E: CHANGING THE OMP-MODL

EPROM

The EPROM (Erasable /Programmable Read Only Memory) contains the software

code which controls the function of the OMP-MODL. Updates to add features and/or

improve performance are sometimes performed on the OMP-MODL by changing the

EPROM to a later version. If desired, contact Omega Engineering, Inc

Service/Repair Dept. about performing the upgrade. When a replacement EPROM is

received, use the following procedure to remove and replace the EPROMs.

CAUTION

The EPROM chip is especially sensitive to damage

from static discharge. Discharge body static before

working with the OMP-MODL and EPROM by

touching a grounded surface. Call with any

questions!

EXTERNAL POWER FUSE

LITHIUM CELL

BATTERY PIGTAIL & CONNECTOR

To change the EPROM chip:

ML006

1. Download any valuable data retained in OMP-MODL memory.

2. Turn off the OMP-MODL power

3. Remove the side retaining screws ( 4 ) holding the bottom plate

or ML-BATT module in place.

4. The EPROM is located in a socket near the end of the exposed

circuit board.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX E: CHANGING THE OMP-MODL EPROM

5. Gently pry the EPROM to be replaced out of its socket with a

small screwdriver or other instrument. Pry at one end then the

other until the EPROM is free from its socket. Use care so that

surrounding circuitry is not damaged.

6. The EPROM has a small notch on one end of the chip. The

socket has a matching notch. Align the notches (see Figure)

while making sure that each of the EPROM’s legs are aligned

with the mating holes in the socket.

7. Press slowly to seat the EPROM in its socket. Visually examine

the installation to insure that all of the EPROM legs are inserted

in their holes.

8. Reassemble the bottom plate and/or ML-BATT module onto the

MLCPU-1 module and reinstall the four side retaining screws.

9. Power up the OMP-MODL. The LCD should display some

verbage (which indicates that the EPROM is correctly installed).

Perform a 3-button initialization at this time with the

following procedure:

A. Depress and hold the NEXT button down on the front

panel.

B. Momentarily, depress the STOP and RESET buttons

simultaneously, then release them.

C. After a second or so, release the NEXT button.

This sequence will result in a complete initialization of the unit.

After a short sequence of display messages on the LCD, a

SYSTEM INITIALIZED message should display momentarily

indicating that the logger was properly initialized. If this

message does not display, repeat the procedure.

10. After initialization, reprogram the logger with a new Net

Program and the unit is ready to deploy

11-122

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX F: FILTERING OPTIONS

APPENDIX F: FILTERING OPTIONS

Many of the Interface Modules can be configured with filtering options for reducing

the noise picked up on sensor or input signal wiring. A short discussion of two of the

filtering methods that are available to the User through icon configuration dialog

boxes follow:

ADC Input Filtering

In the OMP-MODL, a first order noise filter can be enabled within many of the

analog input icon configuration dialog boxes. First order filtering reduces High

frequency noise that may be picked up by sensor wiring. However, filtering slows

down the rate at which a channel can be sampled as it adds additional settling time

to the total time required for a reading.

Additional settling time required for each of the three levels is specified in the table

below.

If speed of execution of the Program Net is not of concern, utilize the High level of

filtering for best noise rejection.

Filter Level

None

Additional Settling Time

High

15 mS

50Hz / 60Hz Sofware Filtering

Noise radiated from utility power lines (including house and building wiring,

appliances and extension cords) and picked up by sensors and associated wiring is

one of the most common sources of data acquisition error.

The OMP-MODL has additional software based filtering capability designed to

remove 50 Hz or 60Hz power line sourced noise from incoming signals. This

filtering capability is especially helpful in applications with sensors and/or wiring

which is in close proximity to utility wiring.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX F: FILTERING OPTIONS

The above plot demonstrates the performance of the 50Hz software filtering. The

plot is from actual data collected by a OMP-MODL (which utilizes the same digital

signal processing) during the development and testing of the software filtering

feature. A 5Vp-p AC swept frequency was super-imposed on a 2.5VDC and input

into a OMP-MODL equpped with an HLIM-1 The input channel was configured with

the 50 Hz filtering enabled. As can be seen from the plot, at 50 Hz, the amplitude of

the noise is radically reduced.

As with all filtering, a compromise is involved. Line Rejection filtering adds

approximately 8.5 mS for 60 Hz rejection (10mS for 50Hz) to the measurement and

processing time required for a reading.

If the desired sampling rate allows, enable Line Reject filtering by selecting 50 or 60

Hz depending on the power line frequency used in the installation locale. In the

USA, 60 Hz should be selected.

11-124

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX G: HYPERNET THEORY OF OPERATION

APPENDIX G: HYPERNET THEORY OF OPERATION

A Program Net is a graphical representation of a sequence of commands. In the

process of transferring the Program Net to the OMP-MODL, the Program Net is

converted over to a sequence of commands. When Enabled, the OMP-MODL

microprocessor follows this sequence of commands to perform the desired functions.

During execution, the microprocessor steps through each of the commands,

completing the command if possible, then moving on to the next command. This

stepping through of commands can be visualized fairly accurately as propogating

through connections between icons in a Program Net.

In execution of a Program Net by the OMP-MODL microprocessor, an order of

operations is followed. The Program Net executes in approximately this order:

1. When a Sample Rate Clocks internal counter counts up to the

User specified sampling period (ie the Update pulse set within

the icon configuration dialog) the Sample Rate Clocks send out

their Update command to any connected icons.

2. Icons connected to the Sample Rate Clock(s) then update their

Outputs (eg taking a thermocouple temperature reading and

presenting the value on the Output)

3. Icons connected to these Outputs then receive the new signal

and process the signal and present it on their Ouput. This

processing then progresses through the remaining icons in the

Program Net from left to right.

4. When the processing has progressed completely through the

Program Net the OMP-MODL then waits (if any time remains),

waiting for the next Sample Rate Clock to generate an Update

command. If the Program Net specifies Seconds resolution

mode (Global Icon), the OMP-MODL goes into a low power

sleep mode to extend battery life.

5. When the Sample Rate Clock generates the Update command,

processing begins sequencing through the Program Net again.

During the execution of the Program Net, some parts of the Net may be skipped for

a number of reasons. Execution will then jump to the next part of the Net and

continue sequencing. Reasons that this might occur include:

The sequence may run into an icon that is not Enabled.

An icon may be encountered that has two inputs, where only one

input was recently processed, and the User has specified that

the Output is to be updated only upon Update of both inputs.

This explains why Program Nets will execute at different speeds if they contain

conditional statements. For example, a Program Net may be developed that

monitors a contact closure input (which can be done 100’s of times per second).

When the contact closes, 10 more channels may be enabled, storing data to

memory. The Program Net will slow accordingly. Also, different branches of a

Program Net may execute at different times if they are driven by Sample Rate

Clocks that have asynchronous (ie not synchronized) Update pulse rates specified by

the User.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX G: HYPERNET THEORY OF OPERATION

NOTES:

11-126

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX H: ACCESSORIES

APPENDIX H: ACCESSORIES

Accessory items for the OMP-MODL portable data logging system include:

Interface Modules - the OMP-MODL family of products

is continuing to expand with powerful plug-moodules

and accessories

Photovoltaic Power Generation Systems - for long

term unattended data logging

RPS-1 Rechargeable Power Supply - for higher

current sensor excitation or output drive (alarm)

applications

OEM Systems - contact Omega Engineering about low

cost “no frills” systems for integration into your

manufactured equipment

Omega Engineering also offers several other data logging / troubleshooting

product lines including:

OM-320 -Portable Data Logging System offering similar

power and flexibility of the OMP-MODL in rugged, self-

contained weatherproof enclosure.

OM-420 - an integrated data logging system that

includes an RPS-1 rechargeable power supply and the

OM-320 all ruggedly packaged in a NEMA 4X rated

enclosure. With this system, higher current sensor

excitation (eg 4-20mA transmitters) is simply configured.

Under control of the OM-320 Program Net, the power to

various sensor loops can be cycled for optimization of

battery life.

The internal batteries can be recharged from

photovoltaics or other low-voltage AC or DC source.

OM-220 - Portable Data Logging System. A self-

contained portable data logging instrument designed for

simple time based sampling applications. Extremely

simple to set up and use, the OM-220 can be configured

from the front panel in seconds.

Contact Omega Engineering Inc for additional information and pricing on

these accessories.

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX I: RS-232 CABLE, PORT AND ADAPTER

NOTES:

11-128

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX I: RS-232 CABLE, PORT AND ADAPTER

APPENDIX I: RS-232 CABLE, PORT, ADAPTER

DB-25 Female

to PIN 4

to PIN 3

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

to PIN 2

to PIN 6

GND

DTR

DB-9 Female

to PIN 3

to PIN 4

to PIN 6

to PIN 2

RXD

TXD

DTR

GND

RTS

CTS

6 5 4 3 2 1

End View of Adapter

Description

+5VDC (current limited source from OMP-MODL)

Ground

Transmit (OMP-MODL output)

Receive (OMP-MODL input)

Not Used

DTR ( OMP-MODL input; computer asserts HI to

wake up the OMP-MODL serial port)

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX I: RS-232 CABLE, PORT AND ADAPTER

RS-232 Port on Logger

6 5 43 2 1

ML119b

6 Conductor Phone Cable

RJ-12 (shown with contacts facing UP)

11-130

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX J: TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

APPENDIX J: TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

Refer to any README.TXT files that may be provided in the HyperWare software

directory after installation for additional comments and troubleshooting tips.

TROUBLESHOOTING PROGRAM NETS:

Probe Point Diagnostics:

If operation of a Program Net is not what was expected, the judicial

insertion of Probe Point icons can be a valuable troubleshooting method.

This insertion of Probe Point icons at various points throughout the net

allows for the real-time display of the values and/or states of various nodes

in the net.

To implement this method of troubleshooting, drag additional Probe Point

icons onto the screen and connect them to various outputs in the net.

Transfer the net to the OMP-MODL and Enable the unit. Via the front panel

LCD or through HyperTrack, the status of each of the Probe Point icons can

be observed. These values will commonly lead you to the crux of the

problem.

Incompatible Net Warning dialog:

This message normally displays during an attempted download and enable

of a Program Net that does not match the current OMP-MODL

configuration. For example if a Program Net uses channels on an Interface

Module that is not currently installed in the OMP-MODL, or if configuration

switches on a module are not set correctly, the OMP-MODL will catch this

incompatibility.

In OMP-MODLs running at higher speeds, this message may display if a

Program Net upload is attempted while the OMP-MODL is Enabled. If this

occurs, stop the OMP-MODL and retry the upload.

Bad Program Net warning dialog:

If the OMP-MODL currently does not have a valid Program Net in memory,

this message will display upon enabling.

Correct by uploading a new Program Net.

If the problem persists, perform a 3-button initialization of the unit with the

following procedure, then reprogram the unit with a new net:

A. Depress and hold the NEXT button down on the front panel.

B. Momentarily, depress the STOP and RESET buttons

simultaneously, then release them.

C. After a second or so, release the NEXT button.

SYSTEM ERRORS:

No Display on the OMP-MODL LCD:

Upon power-up of the OMP-MODL, numerous internal checks are

performed. In the event that the LCD never displays the standard “OMP-

MODL” message, a number of problems could exist.

The main batteries may be discharged: a volt meter can be used to

check the voltage across the batteries (remove cover and probe where the

wires are soldered to the battery holders.) If no critical loads are connected

to the Output Relay(s), a load can be put onto the batteries by holding one

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX J: TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

of the Relay switches in the TEST position while observing the voltage.

New batteries will read approximately 9 VDC and batteries below apx 7

volts are essentially dead.

OR... apply an external supply to the EXT power terminals on the MLCPU-1

module.

The OMP-MODL may have a corrupted Program Net:

Perform a system intialization with the following procedure:

A. Depress and hold the NEXT button down on the front panel.

B. Momentarily, depress the STOP and RESET buttons

simultaneously, then release them.

C. After a second or so, release the NEXT button.

NOTE: This 3 button reset will erase all internal data as well as the

currently loaded Program Net. Use with caution.

Power Failure / Batteries drain with External Power Source Connected:

The external power fuse may be blown. This would prevent the logger from

running from the external power source and it would continue running from

the batteries until they discharged. Refer to Appendix D for the location of

this fuse. The fuse can be checked with a continuity meter and should read

less than 1 ohm of resistance. If it is open, replace it with a 1.5A, Littelfuse

P/N: 273.015 available from Omega Engineering Incorporated or an

electronic components distributor.

SERIAL COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS:

Cannot establish an RS-232 link:

Insure that only Omega Engineering OMP-MODL adapters and cables

are used. Also, insure that no gender or pinout adapters (eg 9 pin to 25

pin) are used. Pinout is critical and must be correct for communication to

work. Pinout details are provided in Appendix I.

Check the Port number and that the port is actually working with another

serial package and device (eg a modem).

Refer to addtional considerations in the HyperComm Serial

Communications chapter.

Modem Communication Problems:

Refer to Appendix K for modem configuration details.

Refer to the HyperComm Serial Communications chapter.

HYPERPLOT :

No Data Displays upon loading of File:

Data may actually be loaded but compressed. Select the

Calculations\Zoom All menu choice to view.

ANALOG READINGS:

Incorrect readings on HLIM-1 Channels:

Ensure that the fuse for the particular channel is not blown.

11-132

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX K: MODEM CONFIGURATION

APPENDIX K: MODEM CONFIGURATION

SUPPLEMENT

As modem initialization is never as easy as it should be, this appendix was written

to provide additional assistance in the configuration of modems for communication

between the PC (equipped with the LOCAL modem) and the OMP-MODL (equipped

with the REMOTE modem). Four different configurations with 2400 baud and 14.4

Kbaud modems are provided for general reference (also see modem material

covered in Chapter 5).

Obviously, other combinations will exist, however, it is hoped that some

understanding of the setups can be gleaned from the following examples and

explanations to make life easier. Intelligent experimentation is commonly the best

method for modem configuration... however, after experimentation, if a reliable

connection can’t be implemented, please call our technical support group for

additional assistance.

Modem commands beyond the basics are not standardized and have evolved over

the years as different manufacturers have implemented more advanced features.

Hence, standard commands can’t be supplied for the plethora of modems available

on the market today. The following short list of commands is fairly consistent

between modems:

Attention command

&F0

&F1

Use factory defaults settings 0 (common usage)

Use factory defaults settings 1 (also common)

Turn off local Echo of commands

Enable Result Codes

Use Verbal Result Codes

Local 2400 to Remote 2400 (MDM-2400 Modem Option)

Within the HyperWare Modem Communication Dialog Box, set:

Baud Rate: 2400

Initialization String: AT&F0E0Q0V1 or AT&F1E0Q0V1.

This sets the local modem to its factory defaults (F0 or F1) and then

turns Echo Off and enables Verbal Result Codes. (No error

correction or compression is used in 2400 Baud modems so no

additional settings are required to configure those features in the

Initialization String box).

Local 2400 to Remote 14.4 (MDM-14.4 Modem Option)

Within the HyperWare Modem Communication Dialog Box, set:

Baud Rate: 2400

Initialization String: AT&F0E0Q0V1 or AT&F1E0Q0V1.

This sets the local modem to its factory defaults (F0 or F1) and then

turns Echo Off and enables Verbal Result Codes (usually two

commands, one to Enable Result Codes and one to select Verbal

rather than numeric). (No error correction or compression is used in

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX K: MODEM CONFIGURATION

2400 Baud modems so no additional settings are required to

configure those features in the Initialization String box).

Local 14.4 to Remote 2400

Within the HyperWare Modem Communication Dialog Box, set:

Baud Rate: 2400

Initialization String: Set to disable Error Correction, disable Data

Compression, Echo Off and enable Verbal Result Codes (usually

two commands, one to Enable Result Codes and one to select

Verbal rather than numeric). The commands to disable the

Correction and Compression functions will vary with manufacturer,

so a bit of research may be required in the Modem Manual supplied

with the local 14.4 modem.

Examples of functional strings for two different modems follow:

US Robotics 14.4:

Pract Periphs 14.4:

AT&F1E0X4&N3

AT&F1Q0E0V1&M0

Local 14.4 to Remote 14.4 (MDM-14.4 Modem Option)

Within the HyperWare Modem Communication Dialog Box, set:

Baud Rate: 19,200

Initialization String: Set the local modem to its factory defaults

(F0 or F1) and then turn Echo Off and enable Verbal Result Codes

(usually two commands, one to Enable Result Codes and one to

select Verbal rather than numeric). Error correction can be enabled

and will automatically be negotiated between the modems upon

connection. Data Compression may be enabled on the local

modem, but it will be ignored by the remote modem.

Examples of functional strings for two different modems follow:

US Robotics 14.4:

Pract Periphs 14.4:

AT&F1E0X4

AT&F1Q0E0V1

11-134

USING THE OMP-MODL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.. . APPENDIX K: MODEM CONFIGURATION

USING THE OMP-MODL

11-135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miele Water Heater KM 2011 User Manual
Milwaukee Home Safety Product 2235 20 User Manual
Multiquip Automobile Parts LS600 User Manual
Multiquip Riding Toy J B User Manual
Napoleon Grills Gas Grill BGNV42N User Manual
Oceanic Personal Computer Veo 100Nx User Manual
Olympus Camera Lens 261057 User Manual
Omnimount Indoor Furnishings 300 STMP User Manual
Onkyo CD Player DV P303 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo System TX NR901 User Manual